E:UPL-Helpfile: englisch
:all
%%
.!       23.09.96 kw: for 3.02
.!       Note: coherence for UPL: alle Zeilen mit .!CC einkommentieren
.!|--------------------- lineal ---------------------------|
3,001:098
3,002:099
3,011:255
3,012:258
3,014:259
3,016:264
3,018:266
3,020:267
3,022:268
3,024:270
3,026:272
3,028:274
3,029:281
3,031:282
3,033:293
3,035:300
3,037:301
3,039:308
3,040:309
3,043:310
3,044:311
3,046:315
3,048:316
3,051:317
3,054:318
3,055:345
3,057:347
3,059:350
3,060:351
3,062:354
3,064:356
3,066:357
3,068:359
3,069:360
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
.!ddd:ddd
%%
.!---------------------------------------------------------
.! Dummy-Entries f�r Querverweise:
.! Order:
.!
.!   01-09: about UPD/UPL
.!   10-19: about Keys
.!   20-32: about Analyzer-Functions
.!   40-52: about Generator-Waveforms
.!   53-60: about Generator-Ports
.!   61-69: about Analysator-Ports
.!   70-79: about Help, Commandline
.!   80-89: about Units
.!   90-99: about Panels
.!
.1
TITLE: About UPL
                         U P L
       General Purpose Audio Analyzer and Generator

Help notes on: - @70[Using help]
               - @565[Frequency limit of UPL]
               - @564[Speaker] @15[turn off]
               - @2[All panels]
               - @528[ANALYZER functions]
               - @262[GENERATOR waveforms]
               - @88[Used input & parameters]
               - @89[Used output & parameters]
               - @3[Screen splitting]
               - @4[Internal and external keyboard]
               - @71[Softkeys]
               - @5[Error messages]
               - @36[Applications]
               - @1199[Automatic Control (UPL-B10)]


.2
TITLE: About panels

All settings of the @1[UPL] are made by means of panels.

Panels can be accessed directly by pressing the
corresponding @4[key]. The panels displayed on the screen
can be toggled with the  "->|" and "|<-" keys.

Settings within a panel can be accessed with the cursor
and tabulator keys. When the mouse is connected and
installed, settings can be also be performed with the mouse.

A setting within a window can be selected by entering the
first letter of the menu item.

   Panel:      contains:

 - @90[GRAPH]:     Window to display graphics
               (size: two panels or full screen)
 - @91[DISPLAY]:   Parameters for GRAPH
 - @92[GENERATOR]: Generator settings
 - @93[ANALYZER]:  Analyzer settings
 - @94[FILTER]:    Filter definitions
 - @95[FILE]:      Storing and loading of settings
 - @96[OPTIONS]:   Setting IEC address, printer port, 
              @1095[switcher], ...

 - @97[STATUS]:    User defined panel with @98 [û]


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @3[Screen layout]   @4[Keys]   @8[DOS]   @71[Softkeys]


.3
TITLE: About screen usage

the screen of the @1[UPL] is divided horizontally in three
main areas:

TOP - the result area:
      6 @1056[measurement displays] are shown in the middle. The
      right-hand side contains information about the
      @7[status of the UPL].
MIDDLE - the panel area:
      Normally, there are 3 panels, which give access to
      the settings of the UPL. With the @90[GRAPH panel]
      on, there is only one panel.
BOTTOM - the help and softkey area:
      Above 8 context-sensitive softkeys a text line
      provides on-line help about current user options
      like ranges and possible keystrokes.

The screen may be toggled to full graphic (in 3-panel mode
with key @90[GRAPH], in mixed display mode with key
@90[GRAPH] to enter small graphic screen and then key @11[o <--> O]
to expand to full graphic or to an input and output
display with key @10 [SHOW I/O].

Simultaneous use of internal and external screen (either
in black/white or in color) is selectable with
@1053[Extrn Disp] (in @96[OPTIONS panel]).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[Panels]   @4[Keys]   @71[Softkeys]  @1053[Color]  @1056[Dec. Places]


.4
TITLE: About hardkeys / external keyboard

The @1[UPL] may be operated with an external AT-compatible
keyboard. Front panel hard- and softkeys may be replaced
by control sequences and function keys on the external
keyboard.

Front panel = ext. keyboard    Front panel = ext. keyboard

@92[GEN]         = Alt G            @16[START]       = Ctrl F5
@93[ANLR]        = Alt A            @18[SINGLE]      = Ctrl F6
@94[FILTER]      = Alt T            @17[STOP/CONT]   = Ctrl F7
@97[STATUS]      = Alt S            @14[H COPY]      = Ctrl F8/PrtSc
@95[FILE]        = Alt F            @19[SYSTEM]      = Ctrl F9
@91[DISPLAY]     = Alt D            @12[CONTRAST]    = Ctrl F10
@90[GRAPH]       = Alt R            @13[OUTPUT]      = Ctrl F11
@11[o <--> O]    = Alt Z            @15[LOCAL]       = Ctrl F12
@96[OPTIONS]     = Alt O
@10[SHOW I/O]    = Alt I

@70[HELP]        = F1               SELECT      = space
-->|        = -->|             BACKSP      = <--
|<--        = |<--             CANCEL      = Esc
@73[PAGE keys]   = Page keys        ENTER       = Enter
@74[CURSOR keys] = Cursor keys      KNOB        = Ctrl -> and
                                             Ctrl <-
Softkeys corresponds to F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10, F11, F12

F2:     toggles the @1200["logging"] for @1199[BASIC]
F3:     switches between UPL and @1199[BASIC]
Ctrl D: toggles @1054[Meas Disp] (speed up @1[UPL])

The keyboard driver may be selected with the batch BOOTSET.

If a different keyboard is to be used, a batch program
C:\UPL\USERKEYB.BAT should be created. If this batch exists,
it is automatically called prior execution of the UPL
program. This batch should contain the desired parameters
for the keyboard driver.

    Example for C:\UPL\USERKEYB.BAT:
    
        keyb fr       ; <-- This is the french setting

See also c:\UPL\read.me.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @6[Mouse]   @71[Softkeys]   @8[DOS]   @1081[Language]
@1055[Read. Rate]


.5
TITLE: Error messages

In the UPL error states (i.e. defect hardware, software
bugs, wrong settings) are displayed with an error message.
Depending on the severity of the error, the UPL will
continue after the error or break to DOS.

Important: After a program break please send us the used
    setup (file: c:\UPL\setup\UPL.set) together with a
    precise description of the error, the applied input
    signals and the steps which lead to the error and the
    software version. Thus a fast error correction is
    possible.

Note: Soft errors (which normally requires an ENTER
    keystroke from the user) may be suppressed if the
    UPL is started with 'UPL -r'. This is recommended
    for remote operation.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @7[Status messages]   @8[DOS]


.6
TITLE: About using a mouse

The @1[UPL] can be also be operated with a mouse without
the use of an external keyboard.

Simply point to the parameter to be set and press any of
the mouse keys; setting selection is thus activated.
Setting is carried out by pointing to a parameter and
clicking a mouse key.

Any  "Microsoft Mouse" compatible mouse can be connected.

Installation: The file C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT contains the
necessary installation instructions for the mouse. A mouse
should be installed to dir C:\MOUSE and should have the
program name "mouse".

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[Keys]   @8[DOS]


.7
TITLE: About status messages

The status of the analyzer and generator in @1[UPL] is shown
on the right of the result displays:

@93[ANL 1 and 2]:
  OFF:     The corresponding analyzer channel is not used.
  CONT:    Continuos measurement is running.
  SNGL:    Single measurement is carried out.
  TERM:    Single measurement completed.
  STOP:    Measurement halted.
  RANG:    The current @437[measurement range] is being changed.
  OVER:    The corresponding analyzer channel is overdriven
  UNDR:    The corresponding analyzer channel is underranged
           (There is a more suitable measurement range)
  CAL:     The analyzer is performing an @1105[Internal alignment]

  ORUN:    The applied clock rate is too high for the set
           clock rate. The analyzer cannot keep up pace and
           thus comes to a halt.
       --> If the measurement has stopped, a restart can be
           made by selecting the analyzer again or
           pressing @16[Start key].

@92[GEN]:
 RUNNING: Normal output
 BUSY:    The generator is computing a complex waveform
          (lasts up to 1 min).
          (see also @48[RANDOM]).
 HALTED:  The generator was aborted (e.g. through an entry)
          during the computation of a waveform.
      --> The computation and generator will be restarted
          by selecting any parameter again.
 OVERRUN: For the set external @112[clock rate], the applied
          clock rate is too high. The generator cannot keep
          up pace.
      --> If the generator has stopped, a restart can be
          made by selecting the generator again.

SWEEP:


The message CALIBRATION REQUIRED signals that an internal
@1105[calibration] is requested. This calibration is done auto-
matically after the current measurement or after the stop
of the SWEEP.

The built-in real-time clock and the date are also shown.
Time and date can be set in the @8[DOS] environment.

The UPLating of the status display may be suppressed with
@1054[Meas Disp] and/or Ctrl D.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @5[Error messages]   @92[GEN]   @93[ANLR]


.8
TITLE: About DOS

The @1[UPL] is based on an AT-compatible PC. It is thus
possible to start any DOS application after exiting the UPL
software (with the key @19[SYSTEM] or Ctrl F9).

Since the UPL software uses the maximum available memory,
additional drivers and resident programs should not be
loaded if the UPL software is required to run again.

Date and time can be set with the DOS commands "time" and
"date". The @903[file attribute] may be set with "attrib".

Different autoexec.bat files are used to handle different
@4[external keyboards]. Use the batch BOOTSET to select
an other autoexec.bat. BOOTSET also allows the use of
DOSSHELL. (Note: The internal keyboard will be disabled
by DOSSHELL).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @5[Error messages]  @9[Filenames]  @1081[Language]  @1204[Memory Usage]

.9
TITLE: About filenames

The @1[UPL] is based on a AT-compatible PC running under
@8[MS-DOS]. In DOS files are named with up to 8 characters,
followed by "." and an extension with up to 3 characters.

The UPL software predefines following extensions:

@1[UPL]:    .OUT:   DSP-Code          .PDT:   printer driver
        .HLP:   help file         .BPZ:   filter base
        .RLP:   @32[filterreference]   .CAL:   calibrate data

        .SET:   device state      .SAC:   current setup
        .SAL:   current setup + curves

@881[LIMIT]:  .LUP:   limit upper       .LLW:   limit lower
        .LIM:   list of limit exceeded

SWEEP:  .DWL:   @303[SWEEP-list DWELL]  .SPV:   @382[SWEEP-list  VOLT]
        .SPF:   @313[SWEEP-list FREQ]   .SPO:   @401[SWEEP-list  Burst]
        .SPI:   @413[SWEEP-list interval]

USER:   .ARB:   Arbitrary         .TTF:   time table
        .COE:   filtercoeffcients .ZPZ:   Pole zeros in
                                          Z domain
        .PGC:   @87[Protocol GEN]      .PPC:   @166[Protocol Panel]
        .PAC:   @800[Protocol ANA]
        .PGU:   @160[Userdata GEN]      .PAU:   @794[Userdata ANA]
@1017[PRINT]:  .GL:    HPGL-File         .PCX:   screen copy
        .CTX:   @962[Print Comment]

The used directory may be changed with @974[Work Dir].

See the file read.me in C:\UPL for more information about
used files and directories.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @5[Error messages]   @8[DOS]


.10
TITLE: About key SHOW IO

Pressing this key or Alt I on the external keyboard
displays the overview mask of the UPL front panel.

The selected  @88[Inputs] and @89[Outputs] are marked with an arrow.

If a measurement cannot (or could not) be carried out,
the reason for this will be given in the overview mask
on the screen. Should there be several sources of errors,
they can be called up by pressing the SHOW IO key
repeatedly.

Pressing this key again or keys CANCEL or ESC will restore
the previous screen.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @4[Keys]    @71[Softkeys]


.11
TITLE: About key o <--> O

When the active cursor of the @1[UPL] is in @90[GRAPH panel],
pressing this key (or ALT Z) toggles between normal and
expanded GRAPH panel.

When the active cursor (for small GRAPH panel) is located
in a menu panel, pressing this key displays three
menu panels (="big" menu).






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4 [Keys]


.12
TITLE: About key CONTRAST

Pressing this key (or ctrl F10) pops up a menu for
setting the contrast voltage for a LCD. The value is
internally stored in an EEPROM.


Note: This setting doesn't influence an external monitor.







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4[Keys]


.13
TITLE: About key OUTPUT

Pressing this key (or ctrl F11) turns all outputs of the
UPL on or off.

The off-state is marked with a LED.









Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4 [Keys]


.14
TITLE: About key H COPY

Pressing this key (or ctrl F8 on the external keyboard)
opens a dialog box allowing the entry of a @962[comment].

After terminating the text entry (CTRL+ENTER or ESC),
the printing may be started with or without the additional
comment.

The printer is defined with @1017[Destin] and @1020[Printname]
in the @96[OPTIONS panel].

The left border may be set with @1023[Left Marg].

Printing is faster when measurement is halted via the
@17[STOP] key.

A printer is expected on the parallel port (LPT1:).

Pressing H COPY during printing stops the current hardcopy.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4[Keys]


.15
TITLE: About key LOCAL

Pressing this key (or ctrl F12) switches from remote
control via IEEE bus to local operation.


The remote operation is marked with a LED.


If UPL-B5 (speaker) is installed this switch turns speaker
on or off.

Note: if LOCAL LOCKOUT is set on remote operation, this
      key has no effect.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[Keys]   @564[Speaker]


.16
TITLE: About key START

Pressing this key (or Ctrl + F5 on external keyboard)
starts a sweep or single measurement.

The trailing pointers in the bargraph display are reset.









Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4 [Keys]


.17
TITLE: About key STOP/CONT

Pressing this key (or ctrl F7 on external keyboard)
stops/continues a sweep or measurement.











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4 [Keys]


.18
TITLE: About key SINGLE

Pressing this key (or ctrl F6) starts a single
sweep or measurement.

in the MANU SWEEP mode the manual sweep is shifted
to the next position with the @74[cursor keys] or the
knob.







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4 [Keys]


.19
TITLE: About key SYSTEM

SYSTEM or Ctrl + F9 enters a selection box, which allows
the termination of the UPL program.

Selection:
YES: (or press ENTER): Program control returns to @8[DOS].

NO:  (or Cancel / Esc): UPL continues running.

YES - and create dump floppy ....:  Program control returns
     to @8[DOS] and a floppy is written with all the data
     necessary for a diagnosis.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[keys]


.20
TITLE: Function: RMS & S/N

Analyzer acts as a true rms meter.

Subcommands:
 -@530[S/N seq]:    Signal/noise measurement
 -@539[Meas time]:  Integration time
 -@543[Unit Ch1]:   Display unit
 -@546[Reference]:  Display reference value
 -@573[Filter]:     Band and weighting filter
 -@584[Post FFT]:   @30[FFT] after RMS measurement

Notes:
  - An internal DC offset will possibly be included in the
    measurement in the case of the analogue analyzer.
    This may be minimized with the function @1105[CALIBRATE]
    in @96[OPTIONS panel].
  - @429[Min freq] affects the measurement speed in the AUTO
    mode.
  - An @69[additional settling time] may help the filters.
  - If UPL-B5 is installed the signal after the filters may
    be controlled with a @564[speaker].
  - With random or mixed signals the AUTO modes perhaps
    will fail. In such cases it is recommended to measure
    RMS with the @30[FFT]. The same applies to signals with
    a very high distortion.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]


.21
TITLE: Function: RMS SELECT

Analyzer acts as a selective rms meter.
(either measuring only one band or measuring all but
one band)

Subcommands:
- @539[Meas time]:   Integration time
 -@543[Unit Ch1]:    Display unit
 -@546[Reference]:   Display reference value
 -@550[Bandwidth]:   Bandpass width and type
 -@552[SWEEP CTRL]:  Sweep of bandpass
 -@553[FREQ MODE]:   Center frequency

Notes on measurement:
    The bandpass filter is a IIR filter with 8 poles, it
    is designed in the same manner as with @20[RMS S/N].
    All restrictions regarding bandwidth, noise and
    stability as applied to @32[Filter design] are to
    be observed. Problems can occur at low frequencies
    and/or narrow passbands.
    The smallest bandwidth is therefore limited to
    @441[sample rate] / 4800. The measurement accuracy is
    reduced at the lower frequency limit.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @20[RMS S/N]   @528[Other functions]


.22
TITLE: Function: PEAK & S/N

Analyzer acts as a peak level meter

Subcommands:
 -@530[S/N Seq]:    Signal/noise measurement
 -@531[Meas Mode]:  Mode
 -@541[Intv Time]:  Readout interval
 -@543[Unit Ch1]:   Display unit
 -@546[Reference]:  Display reference value
 -@573[Filter]:     Band and weighting filter

Notes on measurement:
  - An internal DC offset will possibly be included in the
    measurement in the case of the analogue analyzer.
    This may be minimized with the function @1105[CALIBRATE]
    in @96[OPTIONS panel].
  - When a square wave is applied, it will band-limited and
    overshoots will occur at the edges (Gibb's phenomenon).
    The overshoots are included in the peak-value
    measurement so that a value higher than that of
    @34[input peak] may possibly be obtained.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]


.23
TITLE: Function: Q-PK & S/N

Analyzer acts as a quasi-peak meter

Subcommands:
 -@530[S/N seq]:    Signal/Noise measurement
 -@541[Intv Time]:  Readout interval
 -@543[Unit Ch1]:   Display unit
 -@546[Reference]:  Display reference unit
 -@573[Filter]:     Band and weighting filter

Notes on measurement:
  - The measurement involves relatively slow integrators
    (complying to standard) which are frequently read out
    at the short @541[Intv Time]. The contents of the measurement
    buffers are not cleared at each sweep step. (previous
    measurements influence the current measurement; this
    is done because of the long time constants in QP).

  - When the @1[UPL] is sweeping, the quasi peak measurement
    is NOT restarted with every step, the integrator
    contents are preserved; therefore old measurements
    may influence the actual one.
    @541[Intv Time] should be chosen large enough (i.e. 3s)
    to get settled measurement values.

  - An internal DC offset will possibly be included in the
    measurement in the case of the analogue analyzer.
    This may be minimized with the function @1105[CALIBRATE]
    in @96[OPTIONS panel].

  - When a squarewave is applied, it will band-limited and
    overshoots will occur at the edges (Gibb's phenomenon).
    The overshoots are included in the quasi-peak-value
    measurement so that a value higher than that of input
    peak may possibly be obtained.

  - To get a plot of the settling of the DUT, set the
    @478[START COND] to TIME CHART. Intermediate results
    will be displayed independent from @541[Intv Time].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL] @2[All panels] @528[Other funct.] @161[Quantization noise meas.]

.24
TITLE: Function: THD

Analyzer acts as a selective distortion meter
(Total Harmonic Distortion)

Subcommands:
 - @548[Fundamentl]:     Definition of fundamental frequency
 - @531[Meas Mode]:      Selection of harmonics
 - @534[SELECT di]:      Selection of individual harmonics
 - @535[Dyn mode]:       Selection measurement optimazation


Notes: By selecting SPECTRUM in @91[DISPLAY panel]
    in the setting of @791[OPERATION], a graphic will
    be displayed in which the lines are marked by columns.
    The level and the frequency of each line may be read
    off.

    The lower frequency limit is @441[sampling rate] / 8100;
    for ANLG 22kHz:  about   6 Hz
    for ANLG 110kHz: about  38 Hz

    The measurement time is approx. 350 ms.

    This measurement detects only harmonics, nonharmonics
    may be measured with @25[THD+N].

    The input signal should have a THD+N better then -20dB.
    If VALUE is selected and the input has a
    frequency < 40 Hz, the value should by entered with
    more then 100 ppm accuracy.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]


.25
TITLE: Function: THD+N/SINAD

Analyzer acts as a broad band distortion meter
(total harmonic distortion plus noise)

Measurement method: A @30[FFT] transformation is performed
    on the input signal; @586[Window]: RIFE-VINC 3 (digital),
    2 (analog), @585[Size]: 8192 points, ZOOM 2:1.
    In this FFT, the areas from the set lower frequency
    to the input signal as well as from the input signal
    to the set upper frequency are integrated and weighted.
    This is related to the complete signal.

    The area about the input signal that is not measured
    is ñ12 * @596[resolution of FFT] (35Hz) or the fundamental,
    whatever is lower, wide.

    For analogue measurements, a prefilter is connected
    ahead of the A/D converter for increased measuring
    accuracy. The post-FFT represents the fundamental
    30 dB too low since it is attenuated by the prefilter.

    Lower measurement frequency:
      ANLG 22kHz:  10Hz
      ANLG 110kHz: 20Hz
      DIGITAL:     10Hz with 48kHz @441[sampling rate],
                        depends on sampling rate.
                        
    Note on NOISE measurement:
        This is the same as THD+N, but harmonics and
        an area of ñ12 * @596[resolution of FFT] (35Hz) around
        each harmonic are not summed up with the noise.
        This measurement has a lower frequency limit of
        36*@596[resolution of FFT] (ANLG 22kHz --> 106 Hz).

    Note on window:
    	For more specialized applications the parameter
        "-tthdn" may be used to select the FFT window to
        be used for the THD+N measurement.

Subcommands:
 -@531[Meas Mode]:   THD+N, SINAD or NOISE
 -@535[Dyn mode]:    Selection of measurement optimazation
 -@536[Rejection]:   Selection of used notch filter
 -@543[Unit Ch1]:    Display unit
 -@548[Fundamentl]:  Definition of fundamental frequency
 -@573[Filter]:      Weighting filter
 -@577[FrqLim low]:  Lower frequency limit
 -@578[FrqLim upp]:  Upper frequency limit
 -@584[Post FFT]:    FFT after TDN/N measurement


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]


.26
TITLE: Function: MOD DIST

A strong signal at low frequencies (70-500 Hz) generates
non harmonics above and below a weaker useful signal at
approximately 5 - 8kHz (SMPTE). They are added up and
divided by the useful signal.

Subcommands:
 -@535[Dyn mode]:   Selection measurement optimazation
 -@543[Unit]:       Display unit (dB or %%)

Notes: By selecting SPECTRUM in @91[DISPLAY panel]
    in the setting of @791[OPERATION], a graphic will
    be displayed in which the lines are marked by columns.
    The level and the frequency of each line may be read
    off.
    Standard: DIN IEC 268, 2nd and 3rd order

Inherent noise indication: digital:  < -120 dB
                           analog:   < -100 dB

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]


.27
TITLE: Function: DIM

not available












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]


.28
TITLE: Function: DFD

Analyzer of @1[UPL] carries out a Difference Frequency
Distortion measurement, which involves two closely
spaced sinewaves of equal amplitude (e.g. 10 and 11 kHz)
being applied to the DUT.

Subcommands:
 -@531[Meas Mode]:  Select line to be measured
 -@535[Dyn mode]:   Selection measurement optimazation
 -@543[Unit Ch1]:   Display unit

Notes: By selecting SPECTRUM in @91[DISPLAY panel]
    in the setting of @791[OPERATION], a graphic will
    be displayed in which the lines are marked by columns.
    The level and the frequency of each line may be read
    off.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]


.29
TITLE: Function: WOW & FL

The @93[Analyzer] measures wow and flutter, the random
frequency offset of a recording equipment. In the
measurement, a sine wave tone of fixed frequency
(usually 3.15 kHz or 3.00 kHz) is played by a
reference tone carrier. Because of the concentricity
tolerance, frequency errors will occur during replay.
Frequency errors are given in %% of the carrier frequency.

Subcommands:
 -@537[Standard]:   Measurement standard
 -@538[Weight]:     Weighting filter
 -@543[Unit Ch1]:   Display unit
 -@584[Post FFT]:   FFT after wow & flutter measurement

Measurement method:
    The input signal is limited symmetrically about the
    test signal with a bandpass (pass band 1000Hz,
    attenuation 80dB, characteristic Bessel) and
    subsequently FM demodulated. The demodulator output
    is sampled with 1/16 of the original @441[sampling rate]
    and stored for a post FFT.

Important: The two channels are alternately measured
    on one DSP. Because of long time constants involved
    with W+F, settling problems are sometimes to be
    expected. Better use only one channel.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]


.30
TITLE: Function: FFT

Analyzer calculates spectrum of input signal. The spectrum
is displayed in the @90[GRAPH panel] if the @91[DISPLAY panel] is
set up in the right manner.

subcommands:
 -@585[FFT Size]    calculated samples
 -@590[Zooming]     OFF or ON
 -@588[Avg Mode]    smooth the display
 -@586[WINDOW]      used window function

if @590[Zooming] is selected ON, following commands
are added:
 -@591[Center]      center of zoom area
 -@592[Span]        width of zoom area

additional information about the FFT is shown in the
commands:
 -@593[Zoom Fact]   under sampling factor
 -@594[Start]       start of calculated spectrum
 -@595[Stop]        end of calculated spectrum (= first
                 line not in spectrum)
 -@596[Resolution]  frequency resolution
 -@597[Meas Time]   acquisition time

Note on the measurement of frequency and amplitude with FFT
  If softkey @72[CURSOR:SET TO]:IMAX (in @90[GRAPH panel] is pressed,
  the @1[UPL] interpolates the discrete lines. By using an
  appropriate @586[window] (i.e. RIFE VINC 1-3) accurate
  frequency and level measurements are possible.

The function result of the FFT is the RMS value, calculated
in the frequency domain. This is normally a quite stable
and fast measurement result (depending on the used window).
There is no result with display @807[Mode] MAX HOLD available.

This function will calculate the phase result (if selected).
However, phase and frequency calcations are not possible
with all @586[windows].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[all panels]   @528[other functions]   Display @807[Mode]


.31
TITLE: about FILTSIM

This is not a measurement function, but the analyzer
simulates selected @94[filters]. The mode of the
simulation is the frequency domain.
The result can be displayed in the @90[GRAPH panel].

The resolution of the filter simulation is
@441[Sample Rate] / 8192, the tracelength is 4096 points.

Subcommands:
 - @573[Filter(1-4)] Selection of filters to be simulated
                     with a @635[shortname].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[all panels]  @32[filter design]  @528[other functions]


.32
TITLE: Filter design in UPL

In @93[ANALYZER panel], band filter can be configured using
the functions @20[RMS], @21[RMS_SELECT], @23[Quasi PEAK] and @22[PEAK].

The filters are defined in @94[FILTER panel] by specifying
the passband and the required attenuation.

On setting the analyzer function, an attempt will be made
to implement the filter with the corresponding
@441[sampling rate].
Each filter has 8 poles and zeroes. The filter definition
is transferred from the sampled (Z) to the continuous (P)
region with the bilinear transformation and normalized.

Band filter (see @617[filter type]) is modelled on 4-pole
highpass and lowpass and 8-pole standard filter of the
elliptic type (ref.: Saal, Handbook of filter design).

Following this normalized representation, a suitable
reference lowpass is looked for that at least fulfils the
given @627[Attenuation].

This reference lowpass thus also determines the ripple in
the passband, skirt selectivity and the characteristic. The
reference filters listed in the file "\UPL\ref\ref_lp.rlp"
have a ripple of 0.1 dB in the passband.

The designed and computed filters can be simulated in the
frequency domain with the use of the ANALYZER function
@31[Filter simulation].

Additional notes:
    Although band filters with very small values in the
    passband (e.g. 50 Hz highpass) can be designed, they
    however tend to oscillate and be noisy because of the
    extreme pole positions involved.
Such filters should be tested before use. Suitable setting
for the test:
- GENERATOR:  DIG48, Output: Ch1, @60[INTERN],
              @40[Sinus] (without dither)
- ANALYZER:   DIG48, Input:  Ch1, @68[INTERN],
              @20[RMS] with @584[post FFT]

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @528[ANALYZER functions]   @69[improving settling]


.33
TITLE: Function: POLARITY

The @93[Analyzer] checks the polarity of the input signal.
An asymmetric input signal is required.

Display: + 1 POL for positive pulses
         waveform:      +-+       +-+       +-+
                    ----+ +-------+ +-------+ +---

         - 1 POL for negative pulses
         waveform:  ----+ +-------+ +-------+ +---
                        +-+       +-+       +-+



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[all panels]   @528[other functions]


.34
TITLE: About: INPUT PEAK

The @93[Analyzer] outputs the peak value measured directly
after the converter to the center of the 3 windows
(if @494[Input] is set to PEAK).

Notes:
  - This value may possibly be superposed by an internal
    DC component and be included in the indication.
    The DC component can be minimized with the function
    @1105[CALIBRATE] in @96[OPTIONS panel].
  - For subharmonic frequencies (ie signal frequencies that
    are integer fractions of @441[sampling rate], the input
    peak may be smaller than the actual peak of the signal.
  - This value is used for the level indication in
    @7[instrument status] and for the @34[auto range]
    in @437[IP range] with AUTO setting.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]   @495[bit display]


.35
TITLE: About: AUTORANGE

The @93[Analyzer] attempts to find the correct measurement
range for the setting @437[IP range] on AUTO. The following
problems may however crop up in connection with
autoranging:
 - The input signal contains a signal component that does
   not lie in the (frequency) measurement range. The range
   suitable for the (useful) signal cannot thus be used
   so that the UPL selects a higher range to prevent the
   overloading of the input stages. --> possibly less S/N

 - A strong DC component is superposed on the input signal
   (BAL). A higher range is selected again for the same
   reason as above.

Autoranging for such signals switches to a slow mode.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[Analyzer]    @438[Manual Ranges]


.36
TITLE: Application overview

Here are some useful hints and settings of the @1[UPL]:

@38[Fast frequency response with FFT noise]
@69[Improving filter settling and response]
@161[Measurement of quantization noise]
@281[Measurement of linearity]
@37[Measurement of Delay]
@154[Reclocking Digital Audio]

Note: @1054[Turning off] of @7[display] updates during the
    measurement speeds up a SWEEP.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[Keys]   @8[DOS]


.37
TITLE: Application: Measurement of Delay

Using the function @614[Waveform] the delay of a DUT
can be measured.
Recommended settings:

Generator:
    Function    SINE BURST

Analyzer:
    Instrument   ANLG 22kHz or DIGITAL
    @528[Function]    @614[WAVEFORM]
    @609[Trig Src]    GEN BURST
    @606[Trig Slope]  RISING

The waveform display is then internally triggered with
the envelop signal of the burst. Therefore the time
between 0 and the start of the burst in the display is
the delay to the DUT.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @36[Applications]


.38
TITLE: Application: FFT-Noise

For a fast measurement of the frequency response of a DUT,
a noise like signal may be created with the @262[waveform]
@48[RANDOM]. This signal may be analyzed optimally with
the @30[FFT] and @586[boxcar window]. Without a DUT the
signal is an even line in the spectrum display.

Settings:
@92[Generator]:
    -@273[Spacing]:    ANLR TRACK
    -@275[Equalizatn]: WHITE or @279[file]
    -@276[Lower Freq] and @277[Upper Freq]: depending on DUT,
          less lines are calculated faster.

@93[Analyzer]:
    -@585[FFT-Size]:    depending on DUT, as small as possible.
    -@586[Window]:      RECTANGULAR

Note: The frequency deviation of the oscillators of
    analyzer and generator may give rise to noise overlay
    if long FFTs and high frequencies are used.
    @588[Averaging] is recommended.
    If the desired spectral distribution is not white, any
    distribution may be selected with a @279[file] (even single
    lines).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @36[Applications]


.39
TITLE: Application:



free







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @36[Applications]


.40
TITLE: Waveform SINE

The generator of @1[UPL] generates a single sine tone.
The tone is calculated with a frequency accuracy of better
than 1 mHz. The accuracy of the output frequency is greater
than 0.00001%% for digital generators. For analogue
generators, the accuracy of the crystals producing the
sampling clock is to be taken as 50 ppm.

Subcommands:
 -@263[Frq offset]:     Frequency offset
 -@268[DC offset]:      Level offset
 -@264[Low dist]:       If option UPL-B1 (low distortion)
                   available: source of gen. sine.
 -@270[Dither]:         Superimposed noise
 -@301[SWEEP CTRL]:     Mode SWEEP
 -@319[Frequency]:      Signal frequency
 -@286[Equalizer]:      Frequency-dependent biasing
 -@329[VOLTAGE]:        Output level

Note: Low Distortion (option) enables ultra 
   low-distortion output signal.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @262[Other waveforms]


.41
TITLE: Waveform MULTISINE

@1[UPL] generates up to 17 definable sine tones. The tones
are adjusted in phase to one another so that a minimal
ratio of peak to rms value is obtained.

Subcommands:
 - @273[Spacing]:       Frequency grid
 - @285[Mode]:          Operating mode
 - @286[Equalizer]:     Frequency-dependent biasing
 - @293[Crest Fact]:    Optimizing mode
 - @295[No of sin]:     Number of tones
 - @319[Frequency]:     Signal frequency
 - @329[VOLTAGE]:       Output level
 - @378[TOTAL GAIN]:    Total gain
 - @393[Ampl Var]:      sinesoid or burst AM

After creating the MULTISINE, additional information is
available:
 - TOTAL PEAK:  Indication of output peak value
 - TOTAL RMS:   Indication of output rms value

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @262[Other waveforms]     @38[FFT Noise]

.42
TITLE: Waveform SINE BURST

The generator outputs two consecutive sine bursts
which are repeated cyclically. The sinewaves start
with a zero crossing on a high level.

Subcommands:
  -@286[Equalizer]:      Frequency-dependent biasing
  -@301[SWEEP CTRL]:     SWEEP mode
  -@319[Frequency]:      Signal frequency
  -@329[VOLTAGE]:        High level during the burst
  -@396[Low level]:      Pause level
  -@400[On time]:        Duration
  -@412[Interval]:       Period
  -@424[BurstOnDel]:     Start Delay

The on-time and period can be swept with this waveform.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @262[Other waveforms]


.43
TITLE: Waveform SINEý BURST

The generator outputs a sine burst with the
sine wave starting at a phase of -90ø.
The output signal thus does not have a bend
(or discontinuity in the first derivation).

Subcommands:
  -@301[SWEEP CTRL]:     SWEEP mode
  -@319[Frequency]:      Signal frequency
  -@329[VOLTAGE]:        High level during the burst
  -@400[On Time]:        Duration
  -@412[Interval]:       Period


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @262[Other waveforms]


.44
TITLE: Waveform SQUARE

@1[UPL] generates a squarewave output.

Subcommands:
 -@301[SWEEP CTRL]:     SWEEP mode
 -@319[FREQUENCY]:      Frequency of fundamental
 -@329[VOLTAGE]:        Output voltage

Notes : the squarewave is output at digital interfaces
    under idealized conditions (without taking into account
    the band limitation of the @112[sample rate]). For this
    reason, only discrete frequencies that can be represen-
    ted by an integer number of samples can be set.
    @268[DC offset] is not available with this waveform in the
    analogue generator.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @262[Other waveforms]


.45
TITLE: Waveform MOD DIST

@1[UPL] generates a waveform for the measurement of modulation
distortions (to SMPTE) consisting of a low-frequency tone
of high amplitude (interfering signal) and a tone at a 
medium frequency (signal)

Subcommands:
 -@263[Frq offset]:  Frequency offset
 -@264[Low dist]:    Source of useful signal
 -@270[Dither]:      Superimposed noise
 -@301[SWEEP CTRL]:  Setting SWEEP
 -@301[UPPER FREQ]:  Frequency of useful signal
 -@301[LOWER FREQ]:  Frequency of interfering signal

 -@380[TOTAL VOLT]:  (Peak) output level
 -@379[Volt LF:UF]:  Level ratio


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @262[Other waveforms]


.46
TITLE: Waveform DFD

@1[UPL] generates two sine tones with same amplitude
and small frequency difference. This signal is usable
for inter modulation measurements.

subcommands:
 -@286[Equalizer]:   Frequency-dependent biasing
 -@312[MEAN FREQ]:   Mean frequency
 -@326[DIFF FREQ]:   Difference frequency
 -@380[TOTAL VOLT]:  Peak output level

Note:
 - The S/N of the analogue DFD signal decreases
   by 30 dB if @268[DC offset] is used.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @262[other waveforms]


.47
TITLE: Waveform DIM

@1[UPL] generates an output signal for the measurement of the
dynamic intermodulation distortion (DIM). The signal
consists of a squarewave of approx. 3 kHz and a sinewave
of approx. 15 kHz.

Subcommands:

-@297[Square/Sin]:  Definition of frequencies to be used
-@298[Bandwidth]:   Squarewave bandwidth
-@327[Setting]:     Settling accuracy of the low distortion
                generator.

Notes:
  - For analogue generators, this function is available
    only together with the option UPL-B1 (low distortion).
  - For digital generators, the squarewave cannot be set
    accurately (depends on the @112[sampling rate]).
  - @268[DC offset] is not available with this waveform in the
    analogue generator.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]  @262[Other waveforms]  @89[Output]


.48
TITLE: Waveform RANDOM

@1[UPL] generates noise (in time and/or frequency domain).

Subcommands:
 -@272[Domain]:      Selection of domain

Required settings in time domain:
 -@278[PDF]:         Amplitude distribution function

Required setting in frequency domain:
 -@273[Spacing]:     Frequency spacing
 -@275[Shape]:       Frequency response
 -@276[Lower freq]:  Lower frequency limit
 -@277[Upper freq]:  Upper frequency limit
 -@286[Equalizer]:   Frequency-dependent biasing
 -@293[Crest Fact]:  Optimizing mode
 -@393[Ampl Var]:    sinesoid or burst AM

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]  @262[Other waveforms]  @7[Status message]
@38[FFT noise]


.49
TITLE:  Lautsprechermessung RUB&BUZZ

Installation of Option UPL-B6 is required.
The Rub & Buzz-measurement is designed for finding
production defects of loudspeakers. These defects appear
as non-harmonic noise or as higher harmonics.
Loudspeakers which are faultless produce harmonics k2 and
k3. Therefore the measurement @25[THD+N] is unsuitable
concerning this matter.
Instead a measuring function is required suppressing not
only the fundamental but also the first harmonics and check
the residual signal.

'RUB&BUZ' is not only a measured function but a set of
measurements specially designed for loudspeakers and can
be partially carried out in parallel. This includes
following measurements:
- RUB & BUZZ-measurement with fixed or tracking high-pass
  @94[filter] or a combination of both,
- at the same time frequency response
- after termination of a sweep or a single measurement:
  measurement of the loudspeaker's polarity.

The RUB&BUZ-measurement is available in both analog
@93[analyzer]s, but not in @1014[high rate mode] of UPL-B29.
About measuring method, the connection of measuring
equipment and speed optimization please refer to
user's manual.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @528[ANALYZER functions]


.50
TITLE: Waveform ARBITRARY

@1[UPL] generates a waveform defined by a @279[file].
This file may contain any number of waveforms. The
following should however be noted:

- The amplitude is referred to 1.0, i.e. a sample in the
  file with the size 1.0 is output with "full scale".
- The output rate depends on the @112[sampling rate] of
  the selected @102[GENERATORS]. The waveform file must
  be designed with the correct rate.
- For analogue outputs, there is an anti-aliasing filter in
  the signal path which requires a certain time for
  transients because of its high stopband rejection.
  It is therefore recommended to select the fastest
  output setting.
- The @380[setting the output level] is made with reference to
  the peak value.
- the following file formats are accepted:
  TTF: ASCII-file with up to 16384 samples
  AWD: output file of R&S-Arbitrary Waveform Designers
  WAV: 8- or 16bit WAV files
  CPR: compressed file format for less than 16 bit applications
  ACC: specially compressed WAV files that contain 
       AC-3 or MPEG data according to IEC 61937.
       can only be output in digital domain (AUDIO DATA).

Notes:
- Formats ACC, WAV and CPR disable @393[Ampl Var]
- The @380[Level] of an ACC-File can not be adjusted

Required settings:
 -@275[Shape]:       waveform file
 -@393[Ampl Var]:    sinesoid or burst AM

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]  @262[Other waveforms]


.51
TITLE: Waveform POLARITY

The Generator of the @1[UPL] outputs a waveform suitable
for checking the polarity. The signal is an asymmetric
SINý pulse.


generated Waveform:     +-+       +-+       +-+
                    ----+ +-------+ +-------+ +---

subcommands:
 -@329[VOLTAGE]:    output level



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]   @262[Other waveforms]   @89[Outputs]


.52
TITLE: Waveform MODULATION 

@1[UPL] generates frequency or amplitude modulated sine.

Subcommands:
 -@319[Mod Freq]:       Frequency of modulation
 -@330[Carr Freq]:      Frequency of carrier
 -@329[Mod Depth]:      Modulation depth in %% (AM)
 -@329[Deviation]:      Deviation in %% (FM)
 -@332[Carr Volt]:      Level of carrier




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]    @262[other waveforms]  @89[Outputs]  @285[Mode]


.53
TITLE: Output to: SERIAL

UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @89[Outputs]


.54
TITLE: Output to SERIAL MUX

UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @89[Output]


.55
TITLE: Output to PARALLEL

UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @89[Outputs]


.56
TITLE: Output to PARAL MUX

UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @89[Outputs]


.57
TITLE: Output to: BAL (XLR)

Output of audio data in AES/EBU format via the
digital interface on the front panel (XLR), labelled
DIGITAL AUDIO, BAL (with option UPL-B2 / UPL-B29 only).

Only possible if:
   - the @102[Generator] is set to DIGITAL and
   - the option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O) or
     UPL-B29 (Digital Audio I/O 96 kHz) is installed.

Subcommands:
  @112[Sample Frq]:  Audio sample rate (one channel)
  @121[Audio Bits]:  Used bits for audio
  @130[Level (Vpp)]: Output level (digital)
  @133[Max Volt]:    Maximum audio level
  @134[Ref Freq]:    Reference frequency
  @87[protocol overview]

The output data stream is taken from the generator, added
with additional data in option UPL-B2 or UPL-B29.

Note: On the rear of the device is a BNC-connector
    "Wordclock OUT", which carries the sample rate.
    The right channel (1) is marked with low, the left
    channel (2) is marked with high level.

External synchronization:       set @112[Sample Frq] to:
 - Sync on word clock input:       EXTERN
 - Sync on current digital input:  SYNCHRON

If the @93[analyzer] is not set to a digital @88[input], the
previous selected input is used as sync source. Default
at power up is @65[BAL (XLR) input].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @89[Outputs]   @87[protocol overview]   @801[protocol analysis]


.58
TITLE: Output to UNBAL (BNC)

Output of audio data in AES/EBU format via the digital
interface on the front panel (BNC), source impedance 75ê.

Available only if:
  - the @102[generator] is set to DIGITAL  and
  - the option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O) or
    UPL-B29 (Digital Audio I/O 96 kHz) is installed.

Subcommands:
  - @112[Sample Frq]:  Audio Sample Rate
  - @121[Audio bits]   Number of bits for the signal
  - @130[Level (Vpp)]: Output level (digital)
  - @133[Max Volt]:    Maximum audio level
  - @134[Ref Freq]:    Reference frequency

The output data stream is taken from the generator, added
with additional data in option UPL-B2 or UPL-B29.

External synchronization:       set @112[Sample Frq] to:
 - Sync on word clock input:    EXTERN
 - Sync on digital input:       SYNCHRON

See also notes on @57[BAL (XLR)].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @89[Outputs]   @87[Protocol overview]   @801[Protocol analysis]


.59
TITLE: Output to OPTICAL

Output of audio data in AES/EBU format via the
optical interface on the front panel (TOSLINK).

Available only if:
  - the @102[generator] is set to DIGITAL  and
  - option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O) or
    UPL-B29 (Digital Audio I/O 96 kHz) is installed.

Subcommands:
  - @112[Sample Frq]:  Audio Sample Rate
  - @121[Audio bits]   Number of bits for the signal
  - @133[Max Volt]:    Maximum audio level
  - @134[Ref Freq]:    Reference frequency

The output data stream is taken from the generator, added
with additional data in option UPL-B2 or UPL-B29.

External synchronisation:       set @112[Sample Frq] to:
 - Sync on word clock input:    EXTERN
 - Sync on digital input:       SYNCHRON

see also notes on @57[BAL (XLR)].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @89[Outputs]   @87[Protocol overview]   @801[Protocol analysis]


.60
TITLE: Output to: INTERN

UPD only


.61
TITLE: Input from: SERIAL MUX

UPD only


.62
TITLE: Input from SERIAL

UPD only


.63
TITLE: Input from: PARAL MUX

UPD only


.64
TITLE: Input from: PARALLEL

UPD only.












more help about:
@1[UPL]   @88[Inputs]


.65
TITLE: Input from BAL (XLR)

Read-in of audio data in AES/EBU format via the digital
interface on the front panel (XLR); with option UPL-B2
(Digital Audio I/O) or UPL-B29 (Digital Audio I/O 96 kHz)
only.

Subcommands:
- @435[Impedance]   Termination
- @446[Audio bits]  Number of bits for signal

The input data stream is split up into audio data and
additional data in option UPL-B2 or UPL-B29, respectively.
The audio data are then measured by the analyzer
(independent of the additional bits and any parity or CRC
errors).

By setting the command @791[OPERATION] in the DISPLAY panel
to PROTOCOL an @801[analysis] of the incoming channel status and
user bits can be made in parallel to the measurement.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @88[Inputs]   @801[Protocol Analysis]   @800[Protocol definition]
@804[Rate Measurement]


.66
TITLE: Input from UNBAL (BNC)

Read-in of audio data in AES/EBU format via the digital
interface on the front panel (BNC), terminated by 75ê;
with option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O) or
UPL-B29 (Digital Audio I/O 96 kHz) only.

Subcommands:
- @446[Audio bits]   Number of bits for the signal

see also @65[BAL (XLR)].




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @88[Inputs]   @801[Protocol Analysis]
@804[Rate Measurement]


.67
TITLE: Input from: OPTICAL

Read-in of audio data in AES/EBU format via the
optical interface on the front panel (TOSLINK).

Subcommands:
- @446[Audio bits]   Number of bits for the signal

see also @65[BAL (XLR)].


with option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O) or
UPL-B29 (Digital Audio I/O 96 kHz) only.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @88[Inputs]   @801[Protocol Analysis]
@804[Rate Measurement]


.68
TITLE: Input from INTERN

The input is made by the internal digital link. Only
with Option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O) or UPL-B29
(Digital Audio I/O) 96 kHz; This input
is only implemented for demo and test purposes.

Only possible if:
   - the analyzer is set to DIGITAL
   - the @102[generator] is set to DIGITAL as well.

Subcommands:
- @439[Sync To]       Signal which synchronizes the Analyzer
- @446[Audio bits]    Number of bits for the signal

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @88[Inputs]


.69
TITLE: Improvement of filter settling

For the @20[RMS] measurement @94[filters] may be selected.
The settling time of these filter is calculated by the
UPL depending on the selected attenuation. This time is
skipped on each start-up of the measurement (SINGLE,
IEC, SWEEP) and then the integration of the RMS value
starts. If a filter hasn't set completely, measurement
results are too high.

Using the FILE_DEF filter "DELAY.COE" in the filter panel
and selecting this filter in the measurement an additional
@634[delay] may be introduced. The filter DELAY.COE has a
frequency response of unity.

If a filter has a too long settling time, try using a
bandpass or bandstop filter instead of a high or lowpass
filter.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @36[Applications]


.70
TITLE: About help

The help information of @1[UPL] is read in from the hard
disk, during this time the message "Just a moment, please"
appears.

Help can be requested to any menu item (line) of a
panel by pressing the HELP key or F1 of the external
keyboard

Longer texts can be scrolled with the @73[Page up] and
"Page down" keys.

The terms colored in gray and green are cross-
references. They can be accessed by means of the cursor
keys or by entering their first letter. Help text is
obtained by pressing SELECT, ENTER or the space key
of the external keyboard.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4[Keys]  @1081[Help-Language]



.71
TITLE: About softkeys (top level)

In @90[Graph panel] the operation is by means of softkeys
and not with menus. The softkeys are arranged in levels.
By activating a softkey the next level is activated. This
level may be exited with BACK (or F5).

Top level:
CURVE:      Selection of curve curve A or B
AUTOSCAL:   Automatic scaling of ALL, A, B or X
o ¡ *¢£:    Selection of active cursor: o or *
o CURSOR:   Cursor manipulation: A, B | A-B | @72[SET TO] | ON
ZOOM:       Definition of zoom size
MARKER:     Marker menu (harmonics, ..)
KEEP:       Freeze curve
SETREF:     Reference point for relative @99[Units]

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4[Keys]


.72
TITLE: About softkeys (menu SET TO)

CURSOR / SET TO set the cursor to a particular
position:

I MAX A:    Interpolates maximum in @30[FFT]
            By actuating this softkey, an interpolated
            value (frequency as well as amplitude) is
            temporarily shown in the display for the cursor
            value
MAX A:      Move to maximum
I MAX B:    As for I MAX A, but curve B
MAX B:      -"-
MARKER:     Move to the X-marker location
            (for @30[FFT] only)
NEXT MKR:   Move to the next harmonic marker

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4[Keys]   @71[Softkeys]


.73
TITLE: About page up/down keys

These keys skip pages in the panels.

If the @90[graphic] window is activated, the scan index is
incremented or decremented. @808[Scan Count] must be >= 2.









Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4[Keys]


.74
TITLE: About cursor keys

Keys to move the cursors.

With @90[Graph] window activated, the  graph cursors
are moved. If @301[MANU SWEEP] is selected and started,
the sweep is stepped. As alternative the roll key can be
used.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @4[Keys]


.75
TITLE: Hints on COHERENCE

The measurement function @77[COHERENCE] uses test
signals covering the whole spektral range;
Noise signal (either defined in time or frequency)
are suitable.

There is no single measurement result, but there
will be two traces calculated; these traces are
firmly attached to the traces selectable in the
display panel:
  Trace A resp. "FUNC CH1":  transfer function CH1/CH2
  Trace B resp. "FUNC CH2":  coherence çý

In the measurement value window the progress of the
averaging is displayed.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @77[COHERENCE]   @76[Limitations]


.76
TITLE: Limitations for COHERENCE

The measurement function @77[COHERENCE] needs most
of the resources of the @1[UPL]. There are some
limitations when using COHERENCE:

- COHERENCE is only available for instrument ANLG 22kHz
  and DIGITAL.
- coherence measurement compares channels 1 and 2;
  therefore both channels must be active.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @77[COHERENCE]   @75[Hints]


.77
TITLE: Function: COHERENCE

The analyzer calculates the coherence function (trace B)
and the transfer function (trace A). This function
requires UPL-B6 installed.

subcommands:
 -@585[FFT Size]    calculated samples
 -@589[Avg Count]   number of average runs
 -@586[WINDOW]      used window function; useful is the
                    HANN window.

additional information about the measurement is shown in the
commands:
 -@594[Start]       start of calculated spectrum
 -@595[Stop]        end of calculated spectrum (= first
                 line not in spectrum)
 -@596[Resolution]  frequency resolution

Measurement procedure:
A complex FFT on each channels is calculated. Both
channels are sampled at the same time. The cross-
spectrum between both channels is calculated and
averaged. The square of this cross-correlation is
then diveded with the averaged absolute value of
the individual FFTs.

                Ý average( crosscorr. A/B) Ýý
    çý(f) = ----------------------------------------
             average(FFT(A))  ù  average(FFT(B)) 

Where:

    0 3/4 çý(f) 3/4  1;

If çý = 1, the DUT is perfectly linear and noise free.
The accuracy of the result increases with more averaging.

Related standard: ANSI S3.42-1992

Get more help about:
@1128[Software Installation]   @75[Hints]
@1[UPL]   @2[all panels]   @528[other functions]   Display @807[Mode]


.78
TITLE: Waveform FSK

This Signal is not available in digital generator of @162[UPL16].
The generator of the @1[UPL] generates a frequency
shift coded sine. A binary Inputsignal is coded with
the two frequencies 1650Hz (=1) and 1850Hz (=0) and
output at 110 Baud. Coding is RS232-like with 7 bits,
LSB first, parity even and 2 stopbits.

The start of an output is triggered with the IEC or
@1198[BASIC]-command:
      UPLout "SOUR: O33 'hello'"

Subcommands:
 -@268[DC offset]:      Level offset
 -@329[VOLTAGE]:        Output level

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]    @262[other waveforms]  @89[Outputs]


.79
TITLE: About Settling

The last measured value is compared continuously with up
to 5 previous measurements.
The current value is marked as valid and displayed, if it
fulfills together with the previous measurements the
tolerance conditions given by the user.
If not, the measurement value is recorded and used for
the next tolerance checking.

Help on:
  -@490[Settling for triggering, START COND]
  -@514[Settling for frequency measurements]
  -@519[Settling for phase measurements]
  -@579[Settling for function measurement]

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[Analyzer]


.80
TITLE: About units (frequency)

Unit for frequency results
--------------------------
Basic unit: Hz (F[Hz])

Value in Ý   Conversion formula
---------+----------------------------------
    Hz   = F[Hz]
    ëHz  = F[Hz]-FREF
    ë%%Hz = 100.0 * (F[Hz] - FREF) / FREF
    Toct = log10(F[Hz] / FREF) * 9.96578
           (Toct = Third Octave = Terz)
    Oct  = log10(F[Hz] / FREF) / 0.30103
    Dec  = log10(F[Hz] / FREF)
    f/fr = F[Hz] / FREF

with:

FREF = @509[Reference] setting from @93[ANALYZER panel].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @99[Units]   @804[Rate Measurement on AES/EBU]   @1056[dec. places]


.81
TITLE: About units (level, analog)

Units for level results and generator output (analog)
-----------------------------------------------------
Functions:  @20[RMS], @21[RMS-Select], @22[PEAK], @23[QPEAK],
            DC, @34[Input Peak], all generator functions

Basic unit: Volt ( V )

         Ý
Value in Ý   Conversion formula
---------+-----------------------------------------
    V    = U[V]
    dBu  = 20.0 * log10(U[V]/0.7745967)
    dBm  = 10.0 * log10(U[V]ý*1000/RREF)
    W    = U[V]ý / RREF
    ë%%V  = (U[V]/UREF-1)*100
    ëV   = U[V] - UREF
    V/Vr = U[V] / UREF
    %%V/Vr= 100.0 * U[V] / UREF
    ë%%W  = (((U[V]ý / RREF) - PREF) * 100.0) / PREF
    ëW   = (U[V]ý / RREF) - PREF
    P/Pr = (U[V]ý / RREF) / PREF
    %%P/Pr= U[V]ý / RREF / PREF * 100.0
    dBr  = 20.0 * log10(U[V]/UREF)

with:
    RREF = value of reference resistance
         = @430[Ref Imped] for analyzer
         = 600ê for generator
    UREF = reference value:  @546[Reference measurement function]
                             @499[Reference input peak]
    PREF = UREFý/RREF

Get more help about:
.! @1[UPL]   @99[Units]   @1005[Conv Fact]   @1056[dec. places]
@1[UPL]   @99[Units]   @1056[dec. places]

.82
TITLE: About units (Level, digital)

Units for level results and generator output (digital):
--------------------------------------------------------
Function:  @20[RMS], @21[RMS-Select], @22[PEAK], @23[QPEAK],
           DC, @34[Input Peak], generator level.

Basic unit: ratio U[FS] 0 ... 1

         Ý
Value in Ý   Conversion formula
---------+----------------------------
    FS   = U[FS]
    %%FS  = U[FS] * 100.0
    dBFS = 20.0 * log10(U[FS])
.!    BtFS = -3.321928 * log10(U[FS]) (see note)
    Hex  = U[FS] * 16777216.0       (see note)
    ë%%   = (U[FS] / UREF - 1) * 100.0
    dBr  = 20.0 * log10(U[FS] / UREF)
    LSBs = 2 ^ (-audiobits) * U[FS]     (see note)
    Bits = log2 (U[FS]) + audiobits     (see note)

U[FS]= value in basic unit ratio 0...1

with:
    UREF = reference value: @546[Reference measure function]
                            @499[Reference input peak]

Notes: Hex:  Display as 6-digit integer, e.g. "434F45 Hex"
%       BtFS: The amplitude given in Bit-Full-Scale
%             corresponds to the number of bit not affected
%             by this amplitude.
%             example: 3 BtFS = 0.125 FS
       LSBs: This unit depends on the number of @121[Audiobits]
             used.
       Bits: This is the number of bits which toggles.

Get more help about:
.!@1[UPL]   @99[Units]   @1005[Conv Fact]   @1056[dec. places]
@1[UPL]   @99[Units]   @1056[dec. places]


.83
TITLE: About units (ratio)

Units for ratio measurements:
----------------------------
Measurement functions: @24[THD], @25[THD+N/SINAD], @26[MOD DIST],
                       @27[DIM], @28[DFD]

Basic unit: ratio given in %% (rel[%%])

value in Ý   conversion formula
---------+------------------------------
    %%    = rel[%%]
    dB   = 20.0 * log10(rel[%%] / 100.0)


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @99[Units]   @1056[dec. places]



.84
TITLE: About units (phase)

Units for analogue/digital phase measurement
--------------------------------------------
Basic unit: degree (P[ø])

Value in Ý   Conversion formula
---------+-------------------------
    ø    = P[ø]
    RAD  = P[ø] * (PI / 180)
    ëø   = DREF - P[ø]
    ëRAD = (P[ø] - DREF) * (PI / 180);
 POL(+/-)= ---

DREF = @513[Reference] setting from ANALYZER Panel, phase

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @99[Units]   @1056[dec. places]


.85
TITLE: About units (digital interface)

Units for digital interface / jitter measurement
------------------------------------------------
Basic unit: Unit Interval (UI)

Value in Ý   Conversion formula
---------+-------------------------
    %%UI  =    [UI]ù100
    ppm  =    [UI]ù1000000
    ns   =    [UI] ù 10e+9 / 128 / @112[sample rate]
    UIr  =    [UI]/UI_ref
    dBr  =    20 ù log10 ([UI]/UI_ref)
    dBUI =    20 ù log10 ([UI])
    %%FRM =   [UI]/128 ù 100
    øFRM =    [UI]/128 ù 360

Note:
    128 UI = 64 Bits   (32 bits per audio sample)
           = 2 Samples (left and right)
           = 1 FRM (Frame)
           = 1/@112[Sample Rate]

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @99[Units]   @1056[dec. places]


.86
TITLE: PostScript configuration file

The PostScript configuration file C:\UPL\REF\PS.CFG is
an ASCII file containing all information about color,
gray level, line width and style of PostScript output.
To edit the file an ASCII editor has to be used on DOS
command line.
The file header of PS.CFG lists all valid colors,
gray levels, line widths and styles,
Example of a PostScript configuration file PS.CFG:
  +-----------------------------------------------+
  Ý# The following linestyles are available:      Ý
  Ý#   ------ or ______, ------,  ......,  .-.-.- Ý
  Ý# The following color strings are available:   Ý
  Ý#   red, green, blue, yellow, magenta, cyan,   Ý
  Ý#   black, gray9, gray8, gray7, gray6,         Ý
  Ý#   gray5, gray4, gray3, gray2, gray1, white   Ý
  Ý# The following gray levels are available:     Ý
  Ý#   0.0 (black) ... 1.0 (white)                Ý
  Ý# The following width values are available:    Ý
  Ý#   Values > 0.0                               Ý
  Ý#         ----------- Line ---------           Ý
  Ý#         Style   Color   Gray Width           Ý
  ÝTRAC A                                         Ý
  ÝScan1:    ______  blue    0.1  1.0             Ý
  ÝScan2:    ______  blue    0.2  1.0             Ý
  Ý   :                                           Ý
  ÝScan17:   ______  blue    0.3  1.0             Ý
  Ý                                               Ý
  ÝTRAC B                                         Ý
  ÝScan1:    ------  magenta 0.1  1.0             Ý
  ÝScan2:    ______  magenta 0.2  1.0             Ý
  Ý   :                                           Ý
  ÝScan17:   ______  magenta 0.3  1.0             Ý
  Ý                                               Ý
  ÝLIMIT LINE                                     Ý
  ÝUpper:    ......  red     0.4  1.0             Ý
  ÝLower:    ......  red     0.4  1.0             Ý
  Ý                                               Ý
  ÝGRID Y                                         Ý
  ÝPriority low:    ______  gray5   0.4  0.3      Ý
  ÝPriority medium: ______  gray6   0.4  0.3      Ý
  ÝPriority high:   ______  gray7   0.4  0.3      Ý
  Ý                                               Ý
  ÝGRID X                                         Ý
  ÝPriority low:    ______  gray2   0.4  0.3      Ý
  ÝPriority medium: ______  gray3   0.4  0.3      Ý
  ÝPriority high:   ______  gray4   0.4  0.3      Ý
  +-----------------------------------------------+

Each line begins with a key word necessary for the search
for the parameters style, color, gray and width.
The parameters must appear in the line of the keyword
and must be separated by at least one blank.
Only those lines are necessary which in fact are required
for the generation of the PostScript format.
Incorrect or missing entries are detected during the access
on this file and indicated as error messages at the 
UPL display.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]

.87
TITLE: Overview Protocol Setting

The generated data stream on digital ports may be modified
with the following commands:

  @137[Validity]:    Setting of validity bit
  @144[Ch Stat. L]:  Mode of channel state data left
  @145[Filename]:    file defining channel state data left
  @151[Ch Stat. R]:  Mode of channel state data right
  @152[Filename]:    file defining channel state data right
  @159[User Mode]:   Mode of user data
  @160[Filename]:    Setting of a file defining user data
  @166[Panelname]:   Setting of a file defining a protocol panel

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @57[BAL (XLR)]   @58[UNBAL (BNC)]   @59[OPTICAL]
@801[protocol analysis]


.88
TITLE: About input selection

Press @10[SHOW-IO] or "Alt I" to get a quick view of the
selected inputs (and outputs).

The UPL can act as an analogue or digital audio analyzer.

- ANALOG:           Setting:
  @425[Analyzer]    ANLG 22kHz, ANLG 110kHz
  @433[Ch1 Input]   used port (channel 1)
  @473[Ch2 Input]   used port (channel 2)

- DIGITAL:
  @425[Analyzer]    DIGITAL
  @433[Input]       used port

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @89[Outputs]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @801[Protocol analysis]


.89
TITLE: About output selection

Press @10[SHOW-IO] or "Alt I" to get a quick view of the
selected outputs.

The UPL can act either as an analogue or digital generator.

- to use an analogue output, set the @102[GENERATOR]
  to ANALOG.
  Related settings:
   - @106[Channel(s)]: used output channel
   - @107[Output]:     used output port
   - @128[Impedance]:  output impedance
   - @133[Max Volt]:   maximum output voltage
   - @134[Ref Freq]:   reference frequency of generator
   - @135[Ref Volt]:   reference level of generator

- to use a digital output, set the @102[GENERATOR]
  to DIGITAL. The generator may either be used as a
  "normal" audio generator or as a test generator for
  jitter-, phase or commom mode measurements. Use
  the field @103[Src Mode] to select the desired function.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @88[Inputs]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @87[Protocol definition]
@564[Speaker]


.90
TITLE: About GRAPH panel

This is a window for showing measurement results as
graphics or @801[protocol information] of the AES/EBU input.
There are several display modes which can be selected by
means of the command @791[OPERATION] in @91[DISPLAY panel].

Press GRAPH key "Alt R" to enter panel.

When the UPL is in the GRAPH panel, pressing above keys
will close the GRAPH panel an reinstall the normal 3-panel
look.

The definition of the things to display and the units and
scales to use is made in the @91 [DISPLAY-Panel] and with
@71[softkeys].

The size of the GRAPH panel is switchable:
  Normal:    as large as 2 normal panels, displayed
             simultaneously with the normal result display
             and another freely selectable panel or the
             @97[status panel].
  Expanded:  full screen, no other panel is on screen.

The @71[Softkeys] or assigned function keys are used
for operation within the GRAPH panel. Cursor keys do not
select commands but merely move the cursor.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @71[Softkey operation]


.91
TITLE: About DISPLAY panel

Panel to set all the parameter for graphic displays.

Press the DISPLAY key or "Alt D" to enter the panel.

Subcommands:
 - @791[OPERATION]:     Display mode (SPECTRUM, @801[PROTOCOL], ..)
 - @807[Mode]:          Operating mode
 - @809[User Label]:    Settings of user defined labels and units
 - @810[TRACE A]:       Contents of curve A
 - @838[TRACE B]:       Contents of curve B
 - @876[X-Scale]:       Definition of the X axis
 - @881[LIMIT]:         Limit curves
 - @899[Comment]:       Comment texts

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @2[All panel]


.92
TITLE: about GENERATOR panel

Panel to select the @89[used output] and the @262[generated waveform].

Press GEN-Button or "Alt G" to enter panel.

subcommands:
 - @102[GENERATOR]:  Selection of generator type
 - @106[Channel]:    Used output channel (1,2)
 - @107[Output]:     Used output port
 - @87[PROTOCOL]:   Added data for @57[BAL (XLR)]
 - @262[FUNCTION]:   Signal (waveform)
 - @301[SWEEP CTRL]: Select mode of sweep


Get more help about:
@2[All panels]   @98[û]   @99[Units]


.93
TITLE: about ANALYZER panel

Panel to select the @88[used input] and the applied
@528[measurement function].

press ANLR-button or "Alt A" to enter panel.

related settings:
 -@425[ANALYZER]:    Selection of analyzer type
 -@478[START COND]:  Selection of analyzer mode
 -@503[FREQ/PHAS]:   Selection of frequency or phase measurement
 -@494[INPUT]:       Control display of converter input
 -@526[MONITOR]:     Control of monitor output (only analog)
 -@528[FUNCTION]:    Selection of measurement function
 -@79[Settling]:    Filter for triggering and measurement
 -@564[Speaker]:     Audio monitoring output

Notes:
 -@35[Auto Range]:   Automatic ranging
 -@34[Input Peak]:   How it works and what it displays

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @2[All panels]  @98[û]  @88[Inputs]  @99[Units]


.94
TITLE: About FILTER panel

Panel to define filters for later use in the @93[ANALYZER].

Press FILTER key or "Alt T" to enter panel.

Subcommands:
 - @617[Filter type]   Selects type of filter
 - @619[Passband]      Sets passband limit frequencies
                    for highpass and lowpass
 - @620[Passband upp]
   @621[Passband low]  Sets the passband limit frequencies
                    for the bandpass filters
 - @622[Center]        Set the center frequency for octave,
                    a third octave and notch

Additional information on defined filters is
given in:
 - @626 [Stopbd upp]  Upper stop band
 - @635 [Shortname]   Abbreviated name which appears
                       in the ANALYZER panel

If the defined filter type is not suitable, any filter
can be specified with FILE DEF.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @2[All panels]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @32[Filter design]


.95
TITLE: about FILE panel

Press FILE key or "Alt F" to enter panel.

The FILE panel offers following commands:
    @932[Load setups]
    @941[Save current setup]
    @956[Save trace]
    @968[Delete files]
    @974[Set working directory]
    @980[Copy files]




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2 [All panels]   @8[DOS]   @9[Filenames]



.96
TITLE: about OPTIONS panel

These settings are mode in the OPTIONS panel that do not
directly belong to the measurement or generator.

Press the OPTION key or "Alt-O" to enter the panel.

Settings included:
- @996[IEC-bus address]
- @997[Exec Macro]        executes macro (B10-BASIC program)
                    (only with Option UPL-B10 installed)
- @157[Digital audio interface]
                    (only @162[UPL16])
- @1017[Printer and plotter]
    @1017[Copy]            To be printed (with plotter)
    @1031[Plot on]         Interface used (with plotter)
- @1053[Extrn disp]        Screen setting (color)
- @1056[Read. Prec]        Used decimal places
- @1081[Language]          Used language in help
- @1095[Switcher]          Use of external switchers
- @1105[CALIBRATE]         Calibrating the analogue analyzer
- @1111[Service password]  Accessing the internal settings

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panel]   @8[DOS]


.97
TITLE: About STATUS panel

This panel holds all the commands of the other panels
selected with the character @98[û].

Press STATUS key or "Alt S" to enter STATUS panel.

The STATUS panel is only available with the small
@90[GRAPH panel]. Only the parameters selected via @98[û]
of the other panels (@92[GENERATOR], @93[ANALYZER], @94[FILTER],
@91 [DISPLAY], @95[FILE], @96[OPTIONS]) appear in this panel.

The panel serves for the simultaneous operation of the @1[UPL]
and viewing of graphic results.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2 [All panels]


.98
TITLE: About û

Commands which have a û character assigned appear in the
@97 [STATUS panel].

Assigning: Move the cursor or the mouse to the free space
           in front of the command with "->|"= tab or
           "|<-" (= shift tab).
           Press SELECT or "space" on the external keyboard

Removing:  Move the cursor to the û next to the command.
           Press SELECT or "space" on the external keyboard



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2 [All panels]


.99
TITLE: About units

The @1[UPL] is able to accept input and to display results
in a variety of units, which are converted automatically.

 - @80 [Frequency units]
 - @84 [Phase units]
 - @81 [Analogue units (level)]
 - @82 [Digital units (level)]
 - @83 [Units (ratio, dB, %%)]
 - @85 [Interface Units (UI, ...)]
 - @809 [User Label]   ('free' unit text in graphics)




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2 [All panels]   @4[Keys]    @1056[Used decimal places]



.!---------------------------------------------------------
.! Ab hier beginnen die panelbezogenen Eintragungen.
.! Die Numerierung der Informationsbl”cke hat einen Offset
.! von 100.
.! @100-@101: reserviert.
.102
TITLE: GENERATOR command GN_IN_SL

GENERATOR:  selects the type of generator to use.

Selectable: ANALOG,  DIGITAL

Description:
    ANALOG:      Output on analogue connectors (XLR)
                 Sample rate is 48 kHz, all @262[waveforms]
                 are available.
    DIGITAL:     Output on digital interface;
                 - UPL with Option UPL-B2 or UPL-B29:
                   @57[BAL (XLR)], @58[UNBAL (BNC)], @59[OPTICAL]
                   or @60[INTERN]) on front panel;
                   @112[Sampling rate] and @121[Audio bits]
                   can be set,
                 - @162[UPL16]: @157[DAI interface] on rear panel,
                   8 kHz @112[Sampling rate] and 13 @121[Audio bits]
                 all @262[Waveforms] are available.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @89[Output]   @262[Waveforms]


.103
TITLE: Generator Command SR_DI_FD

Src Mode sets the intended use of the produced generator
data.

Select from: AUDIO DATA, JITTER, PHASE, COMMON MODE

Description:
  AUDIO DATA:  The generator controls the audio contents
               of the output.
  JITTER:      The generator controls the jitter modulator
               on the digital interface.
  PHASE:       The generator controls the phase offset
               between reference and output. The @153[PLL]
               is used in this mode and cannot be used for
               the analyzer.
  COMMON MODE: The generator controls the common-mode
               voltage of the digital output.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]   @154[Reclocking]


.104
TITLE: Generator Command SR_CO_SM

@162[UPL16] only; activates/deactivates A-Law coding simulation
for generator output.

Select from: PCM LINEAR, A-LAW SIMUL

Description:
  PCM LINEAR:  Coding simulation off;
               generator signal is 13 Bit PCM linear coded.
  A-LAW SIMUL: Generator signal is fed through a A-law-
               coder/dekoder line.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]   @427[Coding Analyzer]   @157[DAI]


.105
TITLE: Generator Command SR_DI_SD

With @111 [external synchronization] selected, PhaseToRef
permits to set a phase offset.

Select from:  Value indicated in UI (=Unit Interval)

Description:
    Setting range:
    ñ64 UI = ñ180ø Phase of word clock

Note:
    128 UI = 64 bits   (32 bits per audio sample)
           = 2 samples (left and right)
           = 1 frame
           = 1/@112[sampling rate]

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.106
TITLE: Generator Command OP_STAT

Channel:   select the active channel

Selectable: according to selected @107[output] one of
            OFF, 1, 2, 2ð1, 2ð-1

Description:
    OFF:    no output
    1:      output on channel 1 (=left, X,Z on AES/EBU)
    2:      output on channel 2 (=right, Y on AES/EBU)
    2 ð 1:  output on both channels
    2 ð -1: channel 2 is the negative signal of channel 1
            (only digital, not available if STEREO SINE)


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.107
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_CONNC

Output sets the used port.

Selection from:  analogue         digital
                 UNBAL            @57[BAL], @58[UNBAL]
                 BAL              @59[OPTICAL], @60[INTERN]

Description:
  analogue:
    BAL:        XLR connectors at front of @1[UPL], signal
                symmetrically between pin 2 and 3.
    UNBAL:      XLR connectors at front of @1[UPL], signal
                active pin is 2, 3 is reference (floating).
                This yields with UPL-Z1 a BNC output.

             +-------+
             Ý       Ý
             1 ø   ø 2     (front view)
             Ý   ø   Ý
             +---3---+
  digital:
    BAL:        XLR connector at front of UPL
    UNBAL:      BNC connector at front of @1[UPL]
    OPTICAL:    TOSLINK connector


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.108
TITLE: Generator Command OU_DI_UF

Unbal Out determines the signal to be output at the BNC
connector on the front panel.

Select from: AUDIO OUT, AUDIO IN

Description:
  AUDIO OUT: The signal applied to the BNC connector is the
             same as that applied to the XLR output socket.
  AUDIO IN:  The input signal is internally through-
             connected and output at the BNC connector.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @154[Reclocking]


.109
TITLE: Generator Command OU_DI_CS

Cable Sim can connect an equivalent network into the
generator output.

Selectable: OFF, LONG CABLE

Description:
 LONG CABLE:
    The equivalent network corresponds to a 100-m
    long cable with a nominal impedance of 110 ohms and
    features lowpass behaviour. The level on the network
    and the output impedance of the digital output remain
    unchanged.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.110
TITLE: Generator Command SR_DI_SS

Gen Sync selects the clock source of the generator.

Select from: AUDIO IN, REF IN, SYNC IN, GEN CLK

Description:
  AUDIO IN:  The generator clock is provided by the
             analyzer input.
  REF IN:    The generator clock is provided by the
             reference input (DARS) at the rear of the
             instrument.
  SYNC IN:   The generator clock is controlled by the BNC
             connector at the rear of the instrument.
             The clock ratio is controlled by the command
             @111[Sync Mode].
  GEN CLK:   The clock is generated by the @1[UPL] itself.
             It is possible to select between 32, 44.1 or
             48kHz and to vary from 27kHz to 55kHz (UPL-B2)
             or 35kHz to 106kHz (UPL-B29), respectively

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.111
TITLE: Generator Command SR_DI_SM

Sync To sets the type of the clock source to SYNC IN 
if @110[Gen Sync] is selected.

Select from: VIDEO 50, VIDEO 60, WORD CLK, WRD CLK INV,
             1024kHz

Description:
  VIDEO 50:    The generator sampling rates 32kHz, 44.1kHz
               and 48kHz are synchronized with the video
               repetition rate of 50Hz.
  VIDEO 60:    Same as above, however for 60Hz (NTSC).
  WORD CLK:    The generator is directly synchronized with
               the applied word clock. @153[PLL].
  WRD CLK INV: Same as above, however the inverted input is
               used for synchronization.
  1024kHz:     Synchronization to an "in-house" clock, e.g.
               for DAB

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @153[PLL]


.112
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_SM_FR

Sample Frq determines the sampling rate of the
generator.

Selectable:
  UPL:     44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, VALUE;
  UPL-B2 : additionally 32 kHz;
  UPL-B29: additionally 88.2kHz and 96 kHz;
  @162[UPL16]:   8 kHz

Description:
  8 kHz:@162[UPL16] (read only): The GSM DAI works on a
        fix sample rate of 8 kHz.
  32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2kHz, 96 kHz:
        Fixed internal sampling rate, accuracy <50 ppm.
  VALUE:The set sample rate is generator with a tunable
        oscillator.

Sampling rate for analogue generator:  48 kHz

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.113
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_SMFVL

Value permits the input of a value for the @112[sampling rate].

Selectable:   Frequency specified in Hz

Description:
    For setting the sampling rate on EXTERN or SYNCHRON,
    the sampling rate applied has to be entered
    accurately since this frequency is used as a reference
    for calculating the frequencies to be output.

    This may not exceed the maximum permissible sampling
    rate of the generator by more than 5%%, otherwise the
    signal calculation routine cannot 'keep up pace'.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[GENERATOR panel]  @89[Outputs]  @804[AES/EBU Rate measurement]


.114
TITLE: Generator Command OP_OV_SM

UPD only


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]     @89[Outputs]


.115
TITLE: Generator Command OU_DI_SF

Sync Out determines the signal to be output at the BNC
connector on the rear panel for synchronization purposes.

Select from:  AUDIO IN, REF IN, SYNC PLL, GEN CLK

Description:
  AUDIO IN:  The audio input is output again, without
             clock conditioning
  REF IN:    same as above, however reference input
  SYNC PLL:  The audio input is output again,
             the clock is conditioned with the internal
             @153[PLL].
  GEN CLK:   The internal generator clock is output.

The setting @116[Type] is used to determine whether
word clock or bit clock is output.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @153[PLL]   @154[Reclocking]


.116
TITLE: Generator Command OU_DI_ST

Type determines the type of signal at the @115[Sync Output].

Select from:  WORD CLK, BIPHASE CLK

Description:
  WORD CLK:     Sync features the @112[sampling frequency].
  BIPHASE CLK:  Sync features 128 times the frequency of the
                sampling frequency.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.117
TITLE: Generator Command OU_DI_RF

Ref Out determines the signal output at the Ref-Out
connector.

Select from: AUDIO IN, AUDIO OUT, AUD IN RCLK, REF GEN

Description:
  AUDIO IN:    The input is through-connected.
  AUDIO OUT:   The same signal is output as on the front
               panel.
  AUD IN RCLK: The input signal is output again, however,
               the clock is conditioned using the built-in
               clock filter (@153[PLL]) so that it is
               jitter-free;
  REF GEN:     Output of the reference generator (In the
               case of output with phase, the reference is
               thus defined).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.118
TITLE: Generator Command SR_DI_RD

Data determines the (audio) contents of the @117[reference output].

Select from: ALL ZERO, ALL ONE

Description:
  ALL ZERO:  All data bits and the additional bits (C,U,V)
             are 0;
  ALL ONE:   All data bits and the additional bits (C,U,V)
             are 1;




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.119
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_WR_LN

Word length sets the number of data bits per sample.

Selectable:  8, 16, 24, 32

Description:
    This command sets all bits of a sample, the valid
    rounded off bits are set with @121[Audio bits].
    The weighting of the bits is determined by specifying
    @120[Wordoffset].




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]  @89[Outputs]    @53[SERIAL]


.120
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_WR_OF

Wordoffset: UPD only












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @89[Outputs]  @53[SERIAL]


.121
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_AD_BT

Audio Bits sets the count of used bits on digital ports.

Selection from: 8 ... 24
                @162[UPL16]: The GSM DAI works on a fix
                       word width of 13 Bits

Description:
    The given number of bits is put in the output sample.
    Data is rounded to the given bit count, the remaining
    bits are set to 0.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @89[Outputs]   @82[Units]


.122
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_WR_SL

Wordsel Ch1 set the logic level signalling channel 1
on line LRSELECT.

Selection from:  HIGH or LOW

Description:
    This selection is only available with @54[SERIAL-MUX]
    or @56[PARALLEL-MUX].

    HIGH:   channel 1 is sent with high level on LRSELECT
    LOW:    channel 1 is sent with low level on LRSELECT


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @89[Outputs]


.123
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_WR_CL

Word Clock sets the edge clocking the output data.

Selection from:  RISING or FALLING

Description: RISING:  Data are applied to the port on the
                      rising edge.
             FALLING: Data are applied to the port on the
                      falling edge.

Notes: - a change in clocking edge may solve problems in
         data transmission.
       - data must be connected MSB justified.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @89[Outputs]   @53[SERIAL]


.124
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_BT_CL

Bitclock sets the polarity of output clock of @92[generator]

Selection from:  RISING, FALLING

Description: RISING:  Data is clocked on the rising edge.
             FALLING: Data is clocked on the falling edge.
    Data:         +-----+           +-----------+     +-
              ----+     +-----------+           +-----+
    Clock:        +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +-
        RISING:  -+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+
                 -+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+
        FALLING:  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +--+  +-

Notes: - a change in clock polarity may solve problems in
         a data transmission.
       - set the menu item @112[Sample Rate] to extern
         to let the UPL accept external bitclock.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @89[Outputs]   @53[SERIAL]


.125
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_BT_FR

Freq Bitclk shows the frequency of the bit clock at the
port.

Selection from:  only display

Description:
    The resulting bit clock for @53[SERIAL] and @54[SERIAL MUX].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR-Panel]    @89[outputs]


.126
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_DT_FT

Data Format ...

Selectable:

Description:
    disabled







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]    @89[outputs]


.127
TITLE: Command OP_BIT

Bit order specifies the timing of the data bits.

Selectable:  MSB FIRST, LSB FIRST

Description:
    MSB FIRST:  The MSB bit is sent out before the LSB bit.
    LSB FIRST:  The LSB bit is sent out before the MSB bit.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @89[Outputs]   @53[SERIAL]


.128
TITLE: Command OP_IMPED

Impedance sets the source resistance of the @92[generator].

Selectable: using UNBAL:  5ê
            using BAL:   10ê, 200ê, 600ê

Description:
    Given here is the source resistance.

Note:
    The reference resistance for unit dBm is 600ê.
    (0dBm = 1mW applied to 600ê, the source resistance is
    taken into account; i.e. the unloaded output voltage
    is adjusted so that voltage across the assumed load of
    600ê will be the desired voltage)

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.129
TITLE: Command OP_LOW

Common sets the grounding of the generator

Selection from:  GROUND, FLOAT

Description:
    GROUND:  The generator is internally connected to earth
    FLOAT:   The generator is internally NOT connected to
             earth.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.130
TITLE: Generator Command OP_LEVEL

Unbal Vpp sets the level of the output @58[UNBAL (BNC)].

Selectable:  level value in volt

Description:
    The level is specified as peak-to-peak value. The out-
    put impedance is 75ê. The specified level applies 
    to terminating with the nominal impedance; 
    the voltage is twice as high for no load.

Note: 
    The level at @57[BAL (XLR)] output is always 4
    times higher than the level at @58[UNBAL (BNC)] output.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @57[BAL (XLR)]   @58[UNBAL (BNC)]


.131
TITLE: Generator Command OP_SL_UB

Bal Vpp sets the level of the output @57[BAL (XLR)].

Selectable:  level value in volt

Description:
    The level is specified as peak-to-peak value. The out-
    put impedance is 110ê. The specified level applies to 
    terminating with the nominal impedance; 
    the voltage is twice as high for no load.

Note: 
    The level at @58[UNBAL (BNC)] output is always 4
    times lower than the level at @57[BAL (XLR)] output.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @57[BAL (XLR)]   @58[UNBAL (BNC)]


.132
TITLE: Command SR_VLRNG

Volt Rang defines the way how the output
amplifiers of the @92[generator] are set.

Selection from:  AUTO or FIX:

Description:
    AUTO:   The internal signal paths are fully
        levelled, the residual output voltage is
        acheived with the output amplifier. This
        results in best thd and noise values.
    FIX:    The output amplifier is set to the
        given @133[maximum value]. The residual
        output voltage is acheived by lower digital
        values on the D/A converter. This allows for
        very fast variation of the output voltage.

Note: This setting is ignored if the option Low
    Distortion Generator is used.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]     @99[Units]


.133
TITLE: Command SR_VL_MX

Max Volt sets the maximum output voltage of the generator

Selection from:  level setting in V or FS.

Description:
    No @262[GENERATOR waveform] can have a higher output
    level as set here.

    This avoids setting of output voltages too large.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]     @99[Units]


.134
TITLE: Command: OP_RF_FR

Ref Freq: Setting of the reference frequency of generators

Selection from:  any value as frequency input

Description:
    The given frequency is the reference value for
    frequency inputs as ratio. (e.g. in 3rd octaves
    (=Terz) or in Octaves). This value will be used
    automatically as X reference for the graphics display
    under following conditions:
    - the SWEEP is controlled by the generator
    - the X unit is based on a reference (like f/fr)
    - Skaling is set to AUTO.

    Example:  reference frequency:              1000 Hz
              frequency value (waveform SINE):  1 Octave
              resulting output frequency:       2000 Hz

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]    @80[Frequency units]


.135
TITLE: Command OP_RF_VL

Ref Volt:   reference level of generator

Selection from:  level setting

Description:
    Level setting (as ratio) are related to the level given
    here.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]     @99[Units]


.!--- AES Generatorbefehle
.! 
.136
TITLE: Generator Protocol: PR_PR_TI

The protocol section of the panel defines the additional
bits added the the audio data stream.

Selectable:   ENHANCED, STATIC or OFF

Description:
    ENHANCED:  The additional bits can be defined with the
         @87[following commands].
         To enable dynamic channel status bits (including
         local time code) and differences between left and
         right data, the analyzer must run the measurement
         function PROTOCOL. Only in this case all options
         of the protocol section are available.
         The Local Time Code automatic counts upward
         starting with generator start up.

    STATIC:    The additional bits can be defined with the
         @87[following commands], but only static settings
         are allowed. Both sides are equal.
         (Only the setting ZERO, FILE and BINARY are
         available; in addition PANEL is allowed if option
         'Digital Audio Protocol' is installed).

    OFF:  The definition of the bits remain unchanged, only
         the section is hidden. Thus, the generator panel
         gets shorter.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @57[BAL (XLR)]   @58[UNBAL (BNC)]   @59[OPTICAL]
@801[protocol analysis]


.137
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_VALID

This command sets the validity bit within the AES/EBU
data stream (for all digital outputs).

Selectable:  NONE, 1 & 2

Description:    NONE:   Validity bit not set
                1 & 2:  Validity bit set in both channels

Notes:
  - Validity true means a 0 at the corresponding bit pos.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.138
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_PARIT

Parity defines whether a parity error should be generated
on digital output signals.

Selection from: TRUE, WITH ERR

Description:
    TRUE:       All samples with correct parity
    WITH ERR:   The parity flag is not set.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.139
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_PARTR

UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]   @138[Parity]


.140
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_PARFA

UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]   @138[Parity]


.141
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_PAROF

UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]   @138[Parity]


.142
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_BBERR

UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.143
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_SQERR

UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.144
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_CHS_L

Ch Stat. L defines the way in which channel status data
LEFT for @57[BAL (XLR)], @58[UNBAL (BNC)], @59[OPTICAL] are to be generated.

Selection from: ZERO,
                FILE+AES3,     PANEL+AES3,
                FILE+CRC,      PANEL+CRC,
                FILE,          PANEL
                BINARY...

Description:
    ZERO:       All channel status data bits are 0.
                (Mode (AES,CRC,RAW) corresponds @151[Ch Stat. R];
                if a CRC or local timecode is generated,
                the corrensponding bits are not zero)
    FILE+AES3:  UPL itself generates the local time code
                and CRC, the remaining channel data are
                taken from a @145[file].
    PANEL+AES3: UPL itself generates the local time code
                and CRC, the remaining channel data are
                set by means of the panel defined by the
                @166[file].
    FILE+CRC,
    PANEL+CRC:  same as AES3-..., however the local time
                code is not generated by the UPL, but set
                as a fixed value.
    FILE,
    PANEL:      same as AES3-..., however neither the local
                time code nor CRC is generated by UPL.
    BINARY...:  A pop-up menu appears, offering the binary
                entry of all 192 status bits. Pressing
                SELECT or space toggles between 0 and 1.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.145
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_FL_FL

Specifying a file that contains channel status data.

Selection from:   @9[Filename]

Description:
    With the keyword AES_CHAN_STAT_RIGHT specified, the
    start of data for the left-hand channel will be
    indicated.
    Similar: AES_CHAN_STAT_LEFT and AES_CHAN_STAT_BOTH.
    BOTH is the default setting.

    Only left-hand data are read here, all other entries
    are ignored.

    @146[Notes on the file format]

    Example: R&S_AES3.PGC

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]   @144[Ch Stat L]


.146
TITLE: Value format for CHAN STAT file

Notes:
  - Values are set with the keyword BIT followed by a
    specified range and by the corresponding value.
    Example:    BIT:12-15,  1
  - If the generator status data are to be taken from the
    analyzer, this can be effected with the keyword TRACK
    in the file instead of a value.
  - The time-of-the-day of the UPL can be specified with
    the keyword TIME instead of a value. In this case the
    time is multiplied by the currently selected
    @112[Sampling rate].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator-Panel]   @87[Protocol overview]   @145[Chan Stat File]


.147
TITLE: Arithmetic averaging of meas. results.

If settling (either @579[Fnct Settl], @514[Freq Settl] or @519[Phas Settl])
is set to AVERAGE, the first resulting value is displayed
after the collection of sufficient measurement results.
Thereafter the newest measurement result deletes the
oldest one, and the new average value is displayed
immediately.
Therefore a rapid change in the input signal results
in relatively slow change of the display; This looks
like an additional low pass. The display will show
the correct value after 'samples' measurement
results.
The display update rate may be reduced with @1055[Reading Rate].
@1055[Reading Rate] is independant from settling.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @79[Settling]


.148
TITLE: Frame-Phase PHAS TO REF

  Measurement of phase between the selected digital input
  and of the reference input "REF IN" at the back of device
  Measurement is not a measured function but as
  input display ("INPUT/PHAS"). For this you have to adjust
  @426[Meas Mode]  = JITTER/PHASE and
  @494[INPUT/PHAS] = PHAS TO REF
  advantage: Display of the phase occurs with the
    presentation of the Jitter measured value at the same
    time.

  @85[selectable phase units]:
	UI | %FRM | §FRM | ns

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]

.149
TITLE: Level of digital input DIG INP AMP

  Measurement of the digital input amplitude.
  This measurement function is selected under menu item
  "INPUT DISP".
  Therefore @426[Meas Mode] = COMMON/INP has to be selected.
  Advantage: The input amplitude can be displayed simul-
    taneously with the common mode measurement function.

  Selectable units:
	V | dBV | dBu | dBm | W | *%V|  *V | V/Vr | %V/Vr | *%W
	|*W	| P/Pr | %P | Pr | dB

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]

.150
TITLE: Function: DC

  Particularities of the analog DC measurement:
  DC-voltages can be measured in the range 0 ... ñ35 V.

  The DC reference point is the connecting point 3 of the 
  XLR female connectors 
  The DC measurement does not use all ranges.
  Automatically the next insensitive and valid range is set
  Valid ranges for DC measurement:
    100mV, 300mV, 1V, 3V, 10V, 30V, 100V

  During a DC measurement, overloading of the measurement
  path caused by a superposed AC voltage causes a less
  sensitive range to be automatically set, which however
  means less measuring accuracy.

  If the DC voltage is superposed by an AC voltage,
  specifying the @539[Meas Time] as integration time
  relative to the signal period of the AC voltage has
  different effects:

  Meas Time is an integer multiple of signal period:
    An integration effect results. The AC voltage is not
    included as part of the DC measurement result.
    Steady display.

  Meas Time larger then, yet no integer multiple of signal
  period:
    As above, yet beat interference occurs in the display.

  Meas Time smaller than signal period:
    No integration effect. The AC voltage is included as
    part of the DC-measurement result, that now follows
    the course of the AC voltage.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]

.151
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_CHS_R

Ch Stat. R defines the way in which the channel status data
RIGHT are to be generated.

Selection from: ZERO,       EQUAL L,
                FILE+AES3,  PANEL+AES3,
                FILE+CRC,   PANEL+CRC,
                FILE,       PANEL

Description:
    This setting is dependent on @144[Ch Stat. L].
    If L is defined by means of a @166[panel], R can only be
    defined via a file. The mode (AES3, CRC, RAW) must
    be the same in the two channels.

    ZERO:       All channel status data bits are 0.
                (Mode (AES,CRC,RAW) corresponds to left
                channel;
                if a CRC or local timecode is generated,
                the corrensponding bits are not zero).
    EQUAL L:    The two channels are identical.
                (Mode (AES,CRC,RAW) corresponds to left
                channel).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.152
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_FR_FL

Specifying a file that contains channel status data.

Selection from:   @9[Filename]

Description:
    With the keyword AES_CHAN_STAT_RIGHT specified, the
    start of data for the right-hand channel will be
    indicated.
    Similar: AES_CHAN_STAT_LEFT and AES_CHAN_STAT_BOTH.
    BOTH ist the default setting.

    Only right-hand data are read here, all other entries
    are ignored.

    @146[Notes on the file format]

    Example: R&S_AES3.PGC

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]   @144[Ch Stat L]


.153
TITLE: PLL on digital interface.

  For conditioning the clock on the digital interfaces, a
  PLL (phase-locked loop) is used.

  This covers a frequency range of 27kHz to 55kHz (UPL-B2)
  or 35kHz to 106kHz (UPL-B29), respectively with a
  control bandwidth of about 500Hz.  If the sampling rate is
  set to a fixed sampling freqency, a crystal oscillator is
  cut in for stabilization; this allows for a frequency
  range of ñ0.4%% about the set frequency.  In this case,
  the bandwidth is approx.  10Hz.

  This PLL is also used in the generator to create a phase
  offset of digital data stream. In this case, jitter cannot
  be measured.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @93[Analyzer Panel]   @154[Reclocking]


.154
TITLE: Reclocking on Digital Interface.

  For conditioning the clock on the digital interfaces, a
  @153[PLL] (phase-locked loop) is used. Thus a jittering
  clock of a input signal may be recovered. It is possible
  to output the regenerated input signal at the reference
  output. Set the @117[Ref Out] field in the generator
  to AUD IN RCLK.







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.155
TITLE: Function: 3rd OCTAVE

Only available with Option UPL-B6 (Extended Analysis
Functions) installed; not available in 110 kHz analyzer
or in @1014[high rate mode] of UPL-B29.
With the third analysis, the RMS levels in up to 32 third-
octave bands are measured simultaneously and displayed
either graphically or numerically in the @90[GRAPH panel].
The third-octave bands to be measured are selected by
entering @532[Line Count], @577[lower] and @578[upper frequency limits].
The function result of 3rd OCTAVE is the total RMS value
of all the selected third-octave.
@275[Pink noise] is the recommended generator signal.

subcommands:
 -@532[Line Count]   maximum number of 3rd octave bands
 -@539[Meas Time]    Integration time
 -@541[Max Hold]     OFF, FOREVER, SLOW/FAST DECAY
 -@577[FrqLimLow]    lower frequency limit
 -@578[FrqLimUpp]    upper frequency limit

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[all panels]   @528[other functions]   Display @807[Mode]


.156
TITLE: Waveform RANDOM+ANLR

@162[UPL16] only; Feedback of analyzer signal with additional
white random noise (defined in frequency @272[domain]);
required for acoustic GSM measurement "stability margin".
This special signal can only be generated if the Volt Range
in GENERATOR panel is set to FIX. Otherwise the loop signal
is set to zero gain (muting), while the noise signal
remains activated.

Subcommands:
 -@273[Spacing]:     Frequency spacing
 -@276[Lower freq]:  Lower frequency limit
 -@277[Upper freq]:  Upper frequency limit
 -@293[Crest Fact]:  Optimizing mode
 -@398[Loop Chan]:   analyzer channel used for feedback
 -@399[Loop Gain]:   Setting the feedback gain

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]  @262[Other waveforms]  @7[Status message]
@48[RANDOM]


.157
TITLE: Digital Audio Interface (DAI)

@162[UPL16] only; digital Interface for analysis of mobile tele-
fones (GSM handies); according to GSM 11.10 chapter 36.4.

Subcommands in OPTIONS panel (DIGITAL I/O CONFIG):
 -@1010[Interface]:  interface mode
 -@1011[Mobile]:     Behaviour of UPL in mobile mode (DAI to SS)
 -@1012[Reset]:      Direction and execution of reset
 -@1013[Clock]:      Direction and polarity of data clock
 -@1014[Test Ctrl]:  Test control lines
 -@1015[DAI Source]: Signalsource of audio data

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @102[Generator instrument]  @425[Analyzer instrument]


.158
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_CRERR

CRC Error defines the interval in blocks at which an error
should be produced in the CRC of the status data.

Selection from:  a number between 0...100000

Description:
    0:  no error, all CRCs are correct.
    1..100000: After the specified number of blocks a CRC
       error is generated in both channels at the same time
       (CRC error: the correct CRC is replaced by the
                   inverse bit pattern)

Note: This command is only available if @144[Ch Stat. L]
    or @151[Ch Stat. R] defines AES3 or CRC.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.159
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_USEMD

User Mode defines the way in which user data are to be
generated.

Selection from: ZERO, FILE DEF.

Description:
    ZERO:       All initialized to 0.
    FILE DEF.:  User bits are read out of a @160[file].

Note:   When user bits are modified, both generator and
        analyzer are halted.
        Userbits are to be 192 bits long and are repeated
        every block.
        
Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.160
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_US_FL

Specifies a file which contains user data.

Selection from:   @9[Filename], default file extension:  *.pgu

Description:
  - With the keyword AES_USER_DATA_LEFT, the start of
    data for the left-hand channel will be shown, similar
    the effect of the keyword AES_USER_DATA_RIGHT.
  - Values are to be entered in hexadecimal in the
    following lines without any further keywords.
    Example:   AES_USER_DATA_RIGHT
               0x55504420          # = 'UPL '

    see file: c:\UPL\user\r&s_user.pgu

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.! @161-@165 PR_USFL0-4
.161
TITLE: Application:

To measure quantization noise with the @1[UPL],
following settings are recommended:

@92[Generator]:
    @319[Frequency]:    60Hz

@94[Filter]:
    @617[Filter]:       HPASS
                        400Hz, 100dB.
@93[Analysator]
    @528[Function]:     @23[QUASI PEAK]
    @570[Notch]:        30dB
    @571[Notch Freq]:   60Hz
    @573[Filter]:       select defined highpass

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @36[Applications]


.162
TITLE: UPL16

UPL16 is UPL model especially designed for
acoustical tests of GSM mobiles. It is equipped
with the Digital Audio Interface (@157[DAI]),
artificial voice generator and BASIC programs to
run all necessary test cases.
Together with the Digital Radiocommunication Testers
CRTx or CMD it provides a complete system handling
the acoustical test cases according to the GSM
Phase 2 recommendation 11.10, section 30.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR]   @93[ANALYZER]   @157[DAI]
@104[Coding Generator]   @427[Coding Analyzer]

.163
TITLE: Waveform DC 

@1[UPL] generates a pure DC signal (without AC components)
The DC-voltage can be swept.

Subcommands:
 -@301[SWEEP CTRL]: Mode SWEEP
 -@380[Voltage]:    DC output level



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]    @262[other waveforms]  @89[Outputs]


.164
TITLE: Waveform STEREO SINE

This Signal is not available in @162[UPL16].
It is available only in digital generator, source 
mode AUDIO DATA.
The generator of @1[UPL] generates a stereo signal with 
different sine tones on the left and right channel.
Left and right channel may have a phase delay or different
frequencies, their levels may be same, proportional or
independant.

Subcommands:
 -@263[Frq offset]:     Frequency offset
 -@268[DC offset]:      Level offset
 -@270[Dither]:         Superimposed noise
 -@299[Freq Mode]:      Frequency Mode
 -@300[Volt Mode]:      Voltage Mode
 -@301[SWEEP CTRL]:     Mode of SWEEP
 -@319[Frequency]:      Sine frequency of both channels
 -@319[Freq Ch1]:       Sine frequency of left channel
 -@325[Freq Ch2]:       Sine frequency of right channel
 -@328[Phase Ch2:1]:    Phase of right channel refered to left
 -@286[Equalizer]:      Frequency-dependent biasing
 -@329[Volt Ch1]:       Output level of left channel
 -@397[Volt Ch2]:       Output level of right channel
 -@379[Volt Ch2:1]:     Ratio of output level right to left

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @262[Other waveforms]


.165
TITLE: Generator function CODED AUDIO 

This function is not available in @162[UPL16].
It is available only in digital generator, @103[source mode]
AUDIO DATA.
It can only be selected if option UPL-B23 (CODED AUDIO)
is installed and both channels are active (@106[Channels] 2=1)
The generator of @1[UPL] generates digital coded sinewave
according to IEC 61937.
For generation of the various frequency and levels UPL uses
a library of WAV-Files. The contents of this WAV-Files is
determined by the coding @265[format] selected

Subcommands:
 -@265[Format]:         coding format
 -@266[Chan Mode]:      selection of the active channels
 -@310[Vari Mode]:      variation mode (or sweep 'X Axis')
 -@319[Frequency]:      (variable) frequency of sine wave
 -@267[Frequency]:      fixed frequency of sine wave 
 -@380[Total Volt]:     (variable) level of sine wave 
 -@301[SWEEP CTRL]:     mode of SWEEP

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]   @262[Other waveforms]


.166
TITLE: GENERATOR command PR_PANEL

Specifying a file that contains the definition of the free
definable protocol panel; only if PANEL is selected at the
command @144[Ch Stat. L] or @151[Ch Stat. R].

Selection from: @9[filename]
                default file extension:  *.ppc

Description:
    With this file a input panel adapted to the desired
    protocol may be defined.
    A line in the file containing a command descriptor,
    the corresponding destination bits and the allowed
    value range defines a panel command.

    4 different types of commands are supported:
    - @167[selection commands]        - @168[text commands]
    - @169[value commands (normal)]   - @170[value commands (additive)]

Example: R&S_AES3.PPC

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.167
TITLE: About definable selection commands

With the keyword SELECTION or EXTSELECT in the
@166[panel definition file] followed by parameters a
selection command is defined.
With the keyword RATE_TRK the menu item GEN SMPLFRQ
is added to the parameters, thus allowing for automatic
copy the generator sample rate to the corresponding
status bits. RATE_TRK may be used only for those
bits, which are definded as sample rate indication.

Examples:
  - SELECTION "  Use",      BIT:0,    0="CONS",  1="PROF"
    (Bit 0 of the channel status data may be chosen with
    the menu line '  Use' amoung CONS or PROF.)
  - SELECTION "  Usermod",  BIT:12-15,0="not ind", 3="USER"
    (The 4 bits 12-15 of the channel status data may be
    chosen with the menu line '  Usermod' amoung
    not ind and USER.)
  - RATE_TRK  "  Rate", BIT:6-7, 0="not ind", 1="44.1 kHz",

Notes:
  - Commands may be continued on the next input line
    terminating the current line with "\"
  - Up to 8 choices per SELECTION command and up to 24
    choices per EXTSELECT command are allowed.
  - There are 12 SELECTION and 4 EXTSELECT commands
    available.
  - The BIT range must not exceed 32.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]  @87[Protocol overview]  @167[Panel definition]
@168[Text commands] @169[value commands (normal)]
@170[value commands (additive)]


.168
TITLE: About definable text commands

With the keyword TEXT in the @166[panel definition file]
followed by parameters a text command is defined.

Example:
  - TEXT      "  Origin",   BIT:48-79
    (The 32 bits 48-79 of the channel status data may be
    entered with the menu line '  Origin' as ASCII text.)

Notes:
  - Up to 4 text commands are available.
  - The BIT range must not exceed 32. Therefore only
    4 characters per text command are allowed.
  - If no is entered in the panel, the UPL copies
    the corresponding bits of the Analyzer.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator-Panel]  @87[Protocol overview]  @167[Panel definition]
@167[Selection commands]  @169[value commands (normal)]
@170[value commands (additive)]


.169
TITLE: About definable value commands (normal)

With the keyword VALUE in the @166[panel definition file]
followed by parameters a value command is defined.

Example:
 - VALUE " Abs.Hour", BIT:144-175, MULT:SET_RATE, MULT:3600
   (The 32 bits 144-175 of the channel status data may be
   entered with the menu line '  Abs.Hour' as integer value
   The value entered in the panel is prior multiplied with
   the numbers given with the MULT commands.
   SET_RATE means the currently used @112[sample rate].

Notes:
 - Up to 12 value or addvalue commands are available.
 - The BIT range must not exceed 32, the value input in
   the panel is limited to 31 bits.
 - The keywords MULT are optional (default = 1).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator-Panel]  @87[Protocol overview]  @167[Panel definition]
@167[Selection commands] @168[text commands] @170[value commands (additive)]


.170
TITLE: About definable value commands (additive)

With the keyword ADDVALUE in the @166[panel definition file]
followed by parameters a value command is defined. This
value is added to previous set values.

Example:
  - ADDVALUE "  Abs.Min",BIT:144-175,MULT:SET_RATE, MULT:60
    (To 32 bits 144-175 of the channel status data the
    value entered here (with the menu line '  Abs.Min')
    is added. The value entered in the panel is prior
    multiplied with the numbers given with MULT.
    SET_RATE means the currently used @112[sample rate])

Notes:
  - Up to 12 value or addvalue commands are available.
  - The BIT range must not exceed 32, the value input in
    the panel is limited to 31 bits.
  - The keywords MULT are optional.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator-Panel]  @87[Protocol overview]  @167[Panel definition]
@167[Selection commands]  @168[text commands]  @169[value commands (normal)]


.172
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN00

configurable command, selection type

Selectable:   as defined in the @166[protocol definition file].

Description:
    see @167[selection commands]!







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.173
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN01


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.174
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN02


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.175
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN03


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.176
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN04


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.177
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN05


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.178
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN06


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.179
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN07


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.180
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN08


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.181
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN09


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.182
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN10


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.183
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_EAN11


    see @172[configurable command, selection type]!

.184
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_XEAN0

configurable command, extended selection type

Selectable:   as defined in the @166[protocol definition file].

Description:
    This command is similar to the @167[selection command],
    but the number of allowed entries is higher.
    (24 instead of 8)





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.185
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_XEAN1

    see @184[configurable command, extended selection type]!

.186
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_XEAN2

    see @184[configurable command, extended selection type]!

.187
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_XEAN3

    see @184[configurable command, extended selection type]!

.188
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT00

configurable command, value type

Selectable:   as defined in the @166[protocol definition file].

Description:
    see @169[value commands (normal)]
    or  @170[value commands (additiv)]






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.189
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT01


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.190
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT02


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.191
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT03


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.192
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT04


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.193
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT05


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.194
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT06


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.195
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT07


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.196
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT08


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.197
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT09


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.198
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT10


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.199
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_INT11


    see @188[configurable command, value type]!

.200
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_STR00

configurable command, text type

Selectable:   as defined in the @166[protocol definition file].

Description:
    see @168[text commands]!
    An empty text is interpreted as ANALYZER tracking.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol overview]


.206
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_STR01


    see @200[configurable command, text type]!

.212
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_STR02


    see @200[configurable command, text type]!

.218
TITLE: GENERATOR command FR_STR03


    see @200[configurable command, text type]!

.219
TITLE: operating mode of the mobile
@162[UPL16] in "Interface DAI to MS" mode only.
The two test control lines determine the operating mode of
the mobile. Having set the appropriate test control
signals, a reset pulse has to be applied to activate the
test mode in the mobile.
If DAI to SS or AUX to SS is selected, the lines are at
high impedance.

Select from:   NORMAL MODE, SPEECH DEC, SPEECH ENC,
               ACOUST DEVS.

Description:
  NORMAL MODE: The mobile is in normal operating mode
               (idle mode).
               both test control lines are Low.
  SPEECH DEC : Test of speech decoder / DTX functions
               (downlink)
               Test control line 1 = Low
               Test control line 2 = High
  SPEECH ENC : Test of speech encoder / DTX functions
               (uplink)
               Test control line 1 = High
               Test control line 2 = Low
  ACOUST DEVS: Test of acoustic devices and A/D & D/A
               both test control lines are High.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @102[GENERATOR type]   @425[ANALYZER type]   @157[DAI]

.220
TITLE: Function: 12th OCTAVE

Only available with Option UPL-B6 (Extended Analysis
Functions) installed; not available in 110 kHz analyzer
or in @1014[high rate mode] of UPL-B29.
With the twelfth analysis, the RMS levels in up to 125 
twelfth octave bands are measured simultaneously via FFT and 
displayed either graphically or numerically in the 
@90[GRAPH panel]. The twelfth-octave bands to be measured 
are selected by @577[lower] and @578[upper frequency limits].
The function result of 12th OCTAVE is the total RMS value
of all the selected bands.
In contrast to @155[3rd OCTACE analysis] this measurement is
performed not using bandpass filters but via FFT and on both 
channels simultaneously.
The result can @791[graphically] be displayed as linegraph or
curve plot.
@275[Pink noise] is the recommended generator signal.

subcommands:
 -@539[Meas Time]    Integration time
 -@541[Max Hold]     OFF, ON
 -@577[FrqLimLow]    lower frequency limit
 -@578[FrqLimUpp]    upper frequency limit

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[all panels]   @528[other functions]   Display @807[Mode]


.!@221-@223 frei
.224
TITLE: GENERATOR command JT_FUNCT

Aux Gen turns an auxiliary generator on.
Only possible if:
 - the Digital Generator is used and
 - the options 
   UPL-B1 (Low Distortion Gen),
   UPL-B2 or UPL-B29 Digital Audio I/O (96 kHz) and
   UPL-B22 (jitter analysis)
   are installed.

Selectable:  OFF, ANALOG OUT, COMMON MODE, JITTER

Description:
    OFF: aux generator is turned off.
    ANALOG OUT: aux generator generates a sine waves
         on the @226[analogue outputs].
    COMMON MODE: aux generator generates a common
         mode signel on the digital BAL output (XLR).
    JITTER: aux generator generates the modulation voltage
        for jitter.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator-Panel]  @228[Sweep]  @87[Protokoll-Erzeugung]

.225
TITLE: Generator Command JT_STAT

Channel:   select the active channel of the
        @224[aux generator].

Selectable: OFF, 1, 2, 2ð1

Description:
    OFF:    no output
    1:      output on channel 1
    2:      output on channel 2
    2 ð 1:  identical output on both channels



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.226
TITLE: GENERATOR command JT_CONNC

Output sets the used port of the @224[auxiliary generator].

Selection from:  UNBAL, BAL

Description:
    BAL:    XLR connectors at front of @1[UPL], signal
            symmetrically between pin 2 and 3.
    UNBAL:  XLR connectors at front of @1[UPL], signal
            active pin is 2, 3 is reference (floating).
            This yields with UPL-Z1 a BNC output.

             +-------+
             Ý       Ý
             1 ø   ø 2     (front view)
             Ý   ø   Ý
             +---3---+

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.227
TITLE: Command JT_IMPED

Impedance sets the source resistance of the generator.

Selectable: using UNBAL:  5ê
            using BAL:   10ê, 200ê, 600ê

Description:







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @224[Aux Gen]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.228
TITLE: GENERATOR command JT_FN_SW

SWEEP CTRL command sets the mode of the @224[aux generator] sweep.

Selectable:  OFF,  AUTO SWEEP,  AUTO LIST
                   MANU SWEEP,  MANU LIST
Description:
    OFF:        no SWEEP
    AUTO SWEEP: Switching to the next sweep point
                (calculated by UPL automatically)
                depending on @229[Next step].
    AUTO LIST:  Switching to the next sweep entry in the
                list depending on @229[Next step].
    MANU SWEEP: same as AUTO SWEEP, but stepping with key
                @74[cursor] or roll key (when in GRAPH).
    MANU LIST:  same as AUTO LIST, but stepping with key
                @74[cursor] or roll key.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @4[Keys]


.229
TITLE: Command: JT_SW_NX

Next Step defines the conditions for an advance of the
@228[SWEEP].

Selectable:  ANLR SYNC or DWELL

Description:
    ANLR SYNC: The next step is made when the analyzer
            is ready with a measurement.
 !->    Important: If the analyzer cannot supply a
            measurement result, the sweep has gap and
            continues with the next point.
        Example: Analyzer measures RMS, mode AUTO, with
            filters. As the signal enters the stopband of
            the filter, the analyzer cannot detect any zero
            crossings and will not be able to carry out a
            measurement.
        To get over the problem: Sweep with DWELL or
            set RMS to FAST, SLOW, or VALUE.
    DWELL:  Sweep is stepped after the time given
            by @236[Dwell].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @4[Keys]


.230
TITLE: GENERATOR command JT_LS_FL

File for sweep dwell times

Selectable:   @9[Filenames]

Description:
    The file contains dwell times for the sweep steps.
    If there are fewer times given in the file than the
    actual sweep points for the active generator sweep,
    the dwell time last specified is used for the
    remaining sweep points.

    Default file extension: *.dwl

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.! @231 - @235 JT_LSFL0 - JT_LSFL4
.236
TITLE: Generator command JT_SW_DW

Dwell sets the delay time when sweeping.

Selection from:  any time in the given range

Description:
    see @229[Next Step].







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.237
TITLE: Generator Command JT_SW1CT

X Axis sets the swept parameter.

Selection from:  VOLT or FREQ

Description:
    VOLT:   the output level of the @224[aux generator]
            is swept.
    FREQ:   the frequency of the aux generator is swept.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.238
TITLE: Command: JT_FR_FL

SWEEP file for frequency

Selection from:  @9[filename]

Description:
    default file extension: *.spf







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.! @239 - @243 JT_FRFL0 - JT_FRFL4
.244
TITLE: Command: JT_FR

FREQUENCY sets the frequency of the data content, supplied
by the @224[auxiliary generator].

Selection from:  float value with the limits as shown in
                 the on-line help.

Description:
    Anlg Freq: Frequency of analogue generator.
    Comm Freq: Frequency of COMMON MODE signal injected
               at the digital BAL output.
    Jitt Freq: Frequency injected jitter signal.

Note:
    The signal is generated with the analogue low distortion
    generator and is thus not crystal stabilized.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]   @80[frequency units]


.245
TITLE: Command JT_FR_SC

Spacing defines how frequency SWEEP is to be scaled.

Selectable:  LIN POINTS, LIN STEPS, LOG POINTS, LOG STEPS

Description:
    LIN POINTS: linear scaling, @248[Points] different
                frequencies are generated
    LIN STEPS:  linear scaling, the difference between
                the steps is a constant @249[Frequency].
    LOG POINTS: logarithmic scaling, @248[Points]
                different frequencies are generated.
    LOG STEPS:  logarithmic scaling, the difference
                between the steps is a constant @249[Ratio].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.246
TITLE: Command: JT_FR_ST

Start sets the first value of a frequency sweep.

Selection from:  frequency value

Description:
    Pressing the @16[START] key starts the sweep with
    the first frequency value. The start value may be
    less or greater than the @247[stop] value.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.247
TITLE: Command: JT_FR_SP

Stop sets the end of the frequency sweep.

Selection from:  frequency value

Description:
    The stop value of the sweep may be greater or less
    than the @246[start value]. Stop is independent of
    @249[step] the last point of the sweep.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.248
TITLE: Command: JT_FR_PN

Points sets the count of points of the frequency sweep.

Selection from:  integer value: 2 .. 1024

Description:
    The sweep runs from @246[start] to @247[stop] with the
    given count of points (including both end points).






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]


.249
TITLE: GENERATOR command JT_FR_SS

Step defines the LIN or LOG STEPS of a sweep for @245[Spacing].

Selectable:  LIN STEPS: Frequency entry
             LOG STEPS: Ratio entry

Description:
    The sweep is started at the given start frequency
    and is carried out with the given steps to the stop
    frequency. If the stop frequency is not quite reached,
    it will be set at the end.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.250
TITLE: GENERATOR command JT_VL

VOLTAGE sets the output level of the @224[auxiliary generator].

Selection from: @81[analogue units]

Description:
    VOLTAGE may be given shown as Anl Ampl, Comm Ampl or
    JittPkAmpl.
    The output level is adjusted by means of the option
    UPL-B1 (low distortion generator).

Note:
  - The reference resistance for unit dBm is 600ê.
    (0dBm = 1mW applied to 600ê, the source resistance is
    taken into account; i.e. the unloaded output voltage
    is adjusted so that voltage across the assumed load of
    600ê will be the desired voltage)

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]     @99[Units]


.251
TITLE: Command: JT_VL_FL

SWEEP filename for level

Selection from:  @9[filename]

Description:
    predefinded file extension: *.spv

Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.spv





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.! @252[JT_VLFL0] - @256[JT_VLFL4] frei
.257
TITLE: Command: JT_VL_SC

Spacing defines how level SWEEP is to be scaled.

Selectable:  LIN POINTS, LIN STEPS, LOG POINTS, LOG STEPS

Description:
    LIN POINTS: linear scaling, @260[Points] different
                levels are generated
    LIN STEPS:  linear scaling, the difference between
                the steps is a constant @261[level].
    LOG POINTS: logarithmic scaling, @260[Points]
                different levels are generated.
    LOG STEPS:  logarithmic scaling, the difference
                between the steps is a constant @261[Ratio].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.258
TITLE: Command: JT_VL_ST

Start sets the first output of level sweep.

Selection from:  level setting

Description:
    On pressing the @16[START] key (or ctrl F5) the sweep
    starts with the given level. This level may be higher
    or lower than the @259[stop level].





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.259
TITLE: Command: JT_VL_SP

Stop sets the last level for a sweep.

Selection from:  level setting

Description:
    The stop level may be higher or lower than the
    @258[start level]. Stop is in every case the last level
    to be generated.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.260
TITLE: Command JT_VL_PN

Points set the count of output levels for the sweep.

Selection from:  integer 2 .. 1024

Description:
    The sweep runs from @258[start] to @259[stop] with the
    given count of points (including both end points).






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]


.261
TITLE: Command: JT_VL_SS

Step sets the change in sweep from one point to the next.

Selectable:  for LIN STEPS: level value
             for LOG STEPS: ratio

Description:
    The sweep starts at the given @258[start level]
    and runs with the set steps up or down to @259[stop level].
    If the stop level is not fully reached, it is
    set separately as last point of sweep.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.262
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_FUNCT

FUNCTION:  selects the output waveform of the @92[generator].

Selectable:
    @40[SINE]:        single sine tone (with dither)
    @164[STEREO SINE]: stereo sinus with different tones 
                 on the left and right channel.
    @41[MULTISINE]:   up to 17 definable sine tones
    @42[SINE BURST]:  sine with pauses
    @43[SINEý BURST]: sine with pauses, continuous
    @45[MOD DIST]:    two sine tones usable for modulation
                 distortion
    @46[DFD]:         two sine tones usable for intermodulation
    @48[RANDOM]:      noise (time or freq. domain)
    @50[ARBITRARY]:   user defined waveform and WAV file output
    @51[POLARITY]:    test signal for polarity checks
    @78[FSK]:         frequency shift signal (for ITU-T O33)
    @52[MODULATION]:  frequency or amplitude modulated sine
    @156[RANDOM+ANLR]: random with feedback of analyzer
                 (@162[UPL16] only)
    @163[DC]:          DC signal without AC components
    @165[CODED AUDIO]: digital encoded sinewaves according 
                 to IEC 61937

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @92[Generator panel]   @87[Protocol Definition]
@36[Applications]


.263
TITLE: Command SR_FR_OF

Frq Offset enables an automatic frequency deviation from
        the generator frequency.

Selection from:  OFF or  +1000ppm

Description:
    OFF:      no frequency deviation, the output frequency
              is equal to setup frequency.
    +1000ppm: the output frequency is the setup frequency
              multiplied by 1.001.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.264
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_FN_QL

Low Dist command sets the signal source for generating the
analogue sinewave.

Selectable:  ON or OFF

Description:
    ON:     The Low Distortion Generator (Option UPL-B1)
            generates sinewave signals.
            The settling accuracy is defined with @327[Setting].

        !-> For analogue only, with Option UPL-B1
              with @46[DFD]:      Upper frequency
              with @45[MOD DIST]: Useful signal (high frequency)
              with @47[DIM]:      Sinewave

    OFF:    The signals are generated with the DSP and a
            subsequent D/A converter.

Notes:
  - If the Option UPL-B1 is not installed, the setting
    will not be accepted.
  - @269[DC Offset] and Low Distortion cannot be enabled
    in parallel.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.265
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_CA_FT

Coding format (according to IEC 61937)
available only in digital generator, @103[Source Mode]
AUDIO DATA, function @165[CODED AUDIO] with option UPL-B23 
installed
Generator Sampling Rate must be set to 48 kHz.

Selectable:  AC-3 or DTS

Description:

Up to 6 channels (selected via @266[Chan Mode]):
- 5.1-multi channel signal,
- 2/0-stereo signal or 
- each of the 6 mono channels
Depending on @310[Vari Mode] (in case of sweep "X-Axis")
either @319[Frequenz] or Level (@380[Total Volt]) can be varied.
If level variation has been set one of 4 @267[fix frequencies]
can be selected.
If frequency variation has been set the level is fixed to 
-20 dB. All other parameter ("Audio Services", "Bitstream 
Information" and "Preprocessing") are fixed to their default
settings. Dialog Normalization is set to -27 dB.

    AC-3: Dolby-Digital
    DTS:  Digital-Theatre-Sound

Note:
  Dialog Normalization can be varied from 1 to -31 dB by 
  loading the appropiate Files "00997d01.wav" .. 
  "00997d31.wav" in @266[Chan Mode] SPECIAL

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.266
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_CA_CH

Channel Mode;
available only in digital generator, @103[Source Mode]
AUDIO DATA, function @165[CODED AUDIO] with option UPL-B23 
installed.

Selectable: 2/0 at 192kb/s,
            5.1, L, C, R, LS, RS, LFE at
                   448kb/s (@265[Format] AC-3) or 
                   754kb/s (@265[Format] DTS)

Description:
    2/0 : Stereo at 192 kb/s;
          frequency- and level variation / sweep available; 
          24 Bit coded 
    5.1 : Multi channeltone with all channels active;
          frequency- and level variation / sweep available;
          24 Bit coded; 448 (AC-3) / 754 kb/s (DTS)
    L   : left front    |  single channel at 448 kb/s (AC-3)
    C   : center (front)|                 or 754 kb/s (DTS),
    R   : right front    \ one of 4 fixed @267[fixed frequencies]
    LS  : left rear      / level fix at -20 dB,
    RS  : right rear    |  16 Bit coded 
    LFE : low frequency | 
    SPECIAL : special signal selectable via @279[Shape File]


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.267
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_CA_FR

fix frequency selection;
available only in digital generator, @103[Source Mode]
AUDIO DATA, function @165[CODED AUDIO] with option UPL-B23 
installed.

Selectable:  42  Hz, 997 Hz, 4 kHz, 15 kHz

Description:
     42 Hz: sine frequency set to 41.7 Hz
    997 Hz: sine frequency set to 994.8 Hz
     4 kHz: sine frequency set to 4 kHz
    15 kHz: sine frequency set to 15 kHz

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.268
TITLE: Command SR_VL_OF

DC Offset enables an voltage offset for the generator
        output.

Selection from:  OFF or ON

Description:
    OFF: no offset (nearly).
    ON:  offset given with the @269[following line].

Notes: - This setting is not available when using
         the @264[Low Distortion Generators].
       - The S/N of the analogue @46[DFD] signal decreases
         by 30 dB if DC offset is used.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]     @99[Units]


.269
TITLE: Command VL_TT_OF

Value for DC Offset.

Selection from:  -FS to +FS (for digital generators)
                 -40%% to +40%% of max. possible
                 Output Voltage (for analogue generators)

Description:
    - a DC offset reduces the available LF output voltage
    - @269[DC Offset] and @264[Low Distortion] cannot be enabled
      in parallel.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]     @99[Units]


.270
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_SN_DI

Dither offers the option to superimpose noise on the signal

Selectable:  ON or OFF

Description:
    OFF: The normal output signal is without superimposed
         noise
    ON:  In addition to the signal noise will be
         superimposed whose @271[Peak value] and
         @278[Distribution density] can be freely
         selected.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]   @40[Sinewave]   @45[MOD DIST]


.271
TITLE: Command: SR_DI_VL

The peak value of the superimposed @270[Dithers].

Selectable:  as for @329[generator level]

Description:
Hints on the selection of the dither level:
  - In case of a uniformly distributed noise and rounding
    of the output signal, the dither level should
    correspond to 0.5*LSB of the D/A converter.
  - In case of a uniform noise distribution and
    cut-off of the output signal, the dither level should
    correspond to 1 LSB of the D/A converter.
  - In case of triangular noise distribution,
    the dither level should correspond to 1 LSB of the
    D/A converter. Noise with a triangular distribution
    is recommended by AES for measurements on digital
    systems.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]    @82[Digital units]


.272
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_RN_DM

Domain defines the mode of random generation.

Selectable:  TIME, FREQ

Description:
    TIME:  Random is generated as a standard noise process
           in the time domain. The repetition rate is more
           than 12 hours. The @278[density function] is
           selectable.
    FREQ:  Random is generated as an overlay of many sine
           lines with different frequencies. The @273 [spacing]
           between the lines, the @276 [frequency range]
           and the @275 [shape] of the generated random
           waveform is selectable. Note that the output is
           not true random because there is a repetition
           rate of spacing.
           Calculating the sines requires some time. This
           is indicated with a @7[status message].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]    @48[Random]


.273
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_RN_SP

Spacing determines the frequency resolution of the
generated noise or @41[multi sine].

Selectable:  ANLR Track, USER DEF

Description:
    ANLR Track: the frequency resolution is optimized to the 
                selected analyzer function:
                - for @30[FFT] / @584[Post-FFT] the current value of 
                  the @596 [FFT-resolution] is used
                - for @155[3rd OCTAVE] measurement the spacing is 
                  calculated regarding the samplerates as well as 
                  the @540[integration time] 
    USER DEF:   the value given in @274 [value] is used.

Note: a small value for spacing results in long calculation
    time for the random output. "GEN: busy" is displayed
    during calculation.
    If any action is made during calculation, the generator
    is HALTED. Reselect the output waveform to restart!

    The lower limit for spacing is @112[sampling rate] / 16384.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]   @48[Random]    @272[Random Domain]


.274
TITLE: GENERATOR command RN_SP_VL

Value determines the spacing of the frequency defined
random or multi sine.

Selectable:  a float value as given in the bottom line

Description:
        see @273 [Spacing]!






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]   @48[Random]    @272[Random domain]


.275
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_FN_SH

Shape selects the amplitude distribution of the sines
in the frequency domain.

Selectable: WHITE, PINK, 3rd OCTAVE, FILE

Description:
    WHITE:     All sines between @276 [lower] and @277[upper]
               frequency have same amplitude.
    PINK:      the amplitude of sines between @276 [lower] and
               @277[upper] frequency is proportional to û(1/f).
    3rd OCTAVE:Same as PINK, but limited to one third
               octave.
    FILE:      All sines are defined by values in a @279[file].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]    @48[Random]    @272[Random domain]


.276
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_RN_LF

Lower Freq determines the start of random.

Selectable:  a frequency value from spacing up to
             @277 [upper frequency].

Description: the first generated line is at lower
             frequency.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]    @48[Random]    @272[Random domain]


.277
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_RN_UF

Upper Freq determines the stop of random.

Selectable:  a frequency value from @276[lower frequency]
             up to top generator range.

Description: the last generated line is at upper
             frequency.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR-Panel]    @48[Random]    @272[Random Domain]


.278
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_RN_PD

PDF selects the amplitude distribution of the generated
random waveform or @270[dither].

Selectable:  GAUSS, TRIANGLE, RECTANGLE

Description:
    RECTANGLE:  all output levels (between peak- and
                peak+) have same probability.
    TRIANGLE:   The probability function forms a triangle
                between peak- and peak+
    GAUSS:      The probability function has a gaussian
                shape. peak- and peak+ are at 3 * sigma.

Notes:
    The @271[Level selection for dither] should be
    matched to @121[Audio bits] and the probability
    function.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]    @48[Random]    @272[Random domain]


.279
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_FN_FL

Enter a filename for the definition of the arbitrary output
waveform or the @48[frequency defined random].

Valid file formats are:
  for ARBITARY:
    - output of ARBITRARY WAVEFORM DESIGNER
      (R&S Software AWD-K1 or UPD-K2) with extension ".awd"
    - wavefile-format (extension .WAV) with 8 or 16 audio
      bits and any length (not in @1014[high rate mode] with UPL-B29).
    - compressed format (extension .CPR), generated from
      TTF, AWD or WAV files by a special tool (COMPRESS.EXE)
      that reduces the wordwidth; (not in @1014[high rate mode] 
      with UPL-B29).
    - @280['free' format] as described in the manual or in the
      file "r&s_exam.ttf" in the \UPL\USER directory.
  for RANDOM (frequency defined random):
    - @280['free' format] as described in the manual or in the
      file "r&s_exam.ftf" in the \UPL\USER directory.
    - Equalization file (extension ".veq"), which may
      have been stored from a sweep.
  for CODED AUDIO (in @266[Chan Mode] SPECIAL):
      WAV-file with coded audio signal;
      allows playback of special signals
      - provided by R&S and available in subdirectory "SPEC" or
      - provided by user (created externally)

Limits:
  - the file must not contain more then 16384 samples.
    (except WAV and CPR files)
  - the samples in the file are supposed to be normalised
    to 1.0; A value of 1.0 results in "peak" output.
    (except WAV and CPR files: integer values;
    CPR files are always scale to maximum peak level in
    file).

Note:
    Check the sample rate of the selected @102[generator] to
    fit to your file.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]    @50[Arbitrary]


.280
TITLE: about File format for arbitrary

Timetab format:
  The file is an ASCII file containing the level of each
  sample (one per line) as floats.
  The numbers are announced with the keyword 'TIMETAB_FILE'

Frequency Random:

  The file is an ASCII file containing the level of each
  frequency line (one per line) as floats.
  The numbers are announced with the keyword
  'FREQUENCY_FILE'.
  The numbers give only the ratio between frequencies, not
  the absolute level. This level is set after the phase
  optimizing with @380[VOLT PEAK].

Commentlines start with # and are allowed anywhere, case
is not significant.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]  @48[RANDOM]  @50[Arbitrary]


.! SR_FNFL0 - SR_FNFL4
.281
TITLE: Application: measurement of linearity

To use the @1[UPL] for measuring linearity,
following settings are recommended:

@92[Generator]:
  @262[Function]:     @40[SINE]
  @301[SWEEP CTRL]:   AUTO SWEEP
  @310[X axis]:       VOLT

  This creates a level sweep of the generator.

@93[Analyzer]:
  @528[Function]      @20[RMS] or @30[FFT]
  @539[Meas time]:    AUTO
  @543[Unit Ch1]:     dBr
  @546[Reference]:    GEN TRACK

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @36[Applications]


.285
TITLE: Generator command: SR_ML_MD

Mode defines how the different levels of @41[multi sine]
are set of, which standard is used for generating the 
@46[DFD] signal or wether AM or FM @52[modulations] mode 
is used.

Selection from: multi sine: EQUAL VOLT or DEFINE VOLT
                DFD:        IEC 268 or IEC 118
                Modulation: FM or AM

Description:
  EQUAL VOLT:  all lines of multi sine have the same
               amplitude.
  DEFINE VOLT: each line is adjustable individually
  IEC 268:     the two tones in dfd are defined with
               mean and difference frequency.
  IEC 118:     the two tones in dfd are defined with
               lower and upper frequency.
  FM:          frequency modulated Sine is generated 
  AM:          amplitude modulated Sine is generated 

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @41[Multisine]   @46[DFD]


.286
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_EQ

Equalizer enables the biasing of the output level as a
function of the frequency. The bias is 1.0 at the
@959[norm frequency].

Selection from:  ON or OFF

Description:
    ON:     Use of an @287[equalization file].
            default file extension: *.VEQ
    OFF:    normal output

The file may be stored after a sweep with the command
@956[STORE:EQUALIZATION] in the @95[FILE panel].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[generator panel]


.287
TITLE: GENERATOR command OP_EQ_FL

Equal.File: Name of the file which contains the
preset (desired) amplitude response (for bias).

Selectable:  @8[DOS]-@9[Filename]

Description:
    The file contains amplitude correction values
    at the various frequencies. They are taken into
    account in the setting of the output signal.

    Default file extension: .VEQ

    The file may be stored after a sweep with the
    command @956[STORE:EQUALIZATION].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[Generator panel]


.! @288[OP_EQFL0] - @292[OP_EQFL4] free
.293
TITLE: Generator Command SR_CREST

Crest Fact determines the (phase) optimization with
@41[Multisinus], @48[Random] and @156[RANDOM+ANLR].

Select from: OPTIMIZED, VALUE, DEFINE PHAS

Description
  OPTIMIZED:    The crest factor (the ratio of peak
                to rms value) is minimized.
  VALUE:        The crest factor is set to be as close as
                possible to a @294[selectable value].
  DEFINE PHAS:  The phase reference of the lines can be set
                individually. The start phase of the
                sine-wave oscillation is entered.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.294
TITLE: Generator Command SR_CR_VL

Value input for @293[Crest Factor];

The indicated crest factor is approximated; this is the
easier, the more lines are used for optimization.

For measurements according to ANSI S3.42 a crest factor
of 4(=12dB) is recommended.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.295
TITLE: Command: SR_FN_SN

No of Sin sets the number of different lines in the
generated @41[Multisine].

Selection from:  1 .. 17

Description:
    A frequency input field appears for each selected line.
    If @285[mode] is set to DEFINE VOLT, a level input
    field appears for each line.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]   @41[Multisine]


.296
TITLE: Command: SR_MBOX

Multisine Choice ... opens a pop up box if SELECT is pressed.

Selection from:  see box.

Description:
    The individual values for level, frequency and phase
    of the generated lines can be entered in a table.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]   @41[Multisine]


.297
TITLE: Command: SR_FN_FR

Square/Sin selects the frequency pair to be generated as
DIM test signal.

Selection from:  2.96/14kHz or 3.15/15kHz

Description:
    2.96/14kHz: Square with 2.96kHz, sine with 14kHz.
    3.15/15kHz: Square with 3.15kHz, sine with 15kHz.

  !-> Note: When generating this signal with a digital
            generator, the square frequency may differ
            (depending on @112[sample rate]) from the above
            given frequency.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]    @47[DIM]


.298
TITLE: Command: SR_FN_BW

Bandwidth set the 3dB bandwidth of the squarewave.

Selection from:  30kHz or 100kHz

Description:
    only at waveform @47[DIM] in analogue generators.
    (only available, if UPL-B1 (Low Distortion) is
    installed).





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.299
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_FR_MD

Freq Mode determines the mode of frequency setting of
the 2 channels.

Selectable:  FREQ&PHASE, FREQ CH1&2

Description:
  FREQ&PHASE:  both channels output the same @319[frequency] but
               with a definable @328[phase] relationship.
               Using @301[sweep function] the common frequency
               can be swept.
  FREQ CH1&2:  left (Ch1) and right (Ch2) channel output a
               different sine frequency.
               Using @301[sweep function] the frequency of 
               left channel (ch1) can be swept.
 

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @4[Keys]


.300
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_VL_MD 

Volt Mode determines the mode of voltage setting of 
the 2 channels.

Selectable:  VOLT&RATIO, VOLT CH1&2

Description:
  VOLT&RATIO:  The output levels of right and left channel 
               are set by a definable @379[ratio] relationship.
               Using @301[sweep function] the left channel level 
               can be swept while the right channel follows
               at the defined ratio.
  VOLT CH1&2:  left (Ch1) and right (Ch2) channel output a
               different level.
               Using @301[sweep function] the left channel level
               can be swept while the right channel remains
               constant.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @4[Keys]


.301
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_FN_SW

SWEEP CTRL command sets the mode of the generator sweep.

Selectable:  OFF,  AUTO SWEEP,  AUTO LIST
                   MANU SWEEP,  MANU LIST
Description:
    OFF:        no SWEEP
    AUTO SWEEP: Switching to the next sweep point
                (calculated by UPL automatically)
                depending on @302[Next step].
    AUTO LIST:  Switching to the next sweep entry in the
                list depending on @302[Next step].
    MANU SWEEP: same as AUTO SWEEP, but stepping with key
                @74[cursor] or roll key (when in GRAPH).
    MANU LIST:  same as AUTO LIST, but stepping with key
                @74[cursor] or roll key.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @4[Keys]   @310[X axis]   @311[Z axis]


.302
TITLE: Command: SR_SW_NX

Next Step defines the conditions for an advance of the
@301[SWEEP].

Selectable:  ANLR SYNC or DWELL

Description:
    ANLR SYNC: The next step is made when the analyzer
            is ready with a measurement.
 !->    Important: If the analyzer cannot supply a
            measurement result, the sweep has gap and
            continues with the next point.
        Example: Analyzer measures RMS, mode AUTO, with
            filters. As the signal enters the stopband of
            the filter, the analyzer cannot detect any zero
            crossings and will not be able to carry out a
            measurement.
        To get over the problem: Sweep with DWELL or
            set RMS to FAST, SLOW, or VALUE.
    DWELL:  Sweep is stepped after the time given
            by @309[Dwell].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]   @4[Keys]


.303
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_LS_FL

File for sweep dwell times

Selectable:   @9[Filenames]

Description:
    The file contains dwell times for the sweep steps.
    If there are fewer times given in the file than the
    actual sweep points for the active generator sweep,
    the dwell time last specified is used for the
    remaining sweep points.

    Default file extension: *.dwl

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.! SR_LSFL0 - SR_LSFL4
.309
TITLE: Generator command SR_SW_DW

Dwell sets the delay time when sweeping.

Selection from:  any time in the given range

Description:
    see @302[Next Step].







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.310
TITLE: Generator Command SR_SW1CT

X Axis sets the first dimension of the sweep.

Variation Mode (function @165[CODED AUDIO]) 
determines the variable parameter, if sweep is turned off.

Selection from: FREQ, VOLT, ONTIME, INTERVAL 

Description:
  VOLT:    the output level of the generator is swept.
  FREQ:    the frequency of the generator is swept.
  ONTIME:  the on-time of a burst signal is swept
  INTERAL: the interval time of a burst signal is swept




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.311
TITLE: Command SR_SW2CT

Z Axis sets the second dimension of the sweep.

Selection from:  OFF, FREQ, VOLT, ONTIME, INTERVAL

Description:
  OFF:     only one dimension is swept.
  VOLT:    second sweep over output level.
  FREQ:    second sweep over frequency.
  ONTIME:  second sweep over "on time" of a burst signal.
  INTERAL: second sweep over interval time of a burst.

Notes: If z axis is activated, Scans is switched to
  GROUP and Scan Count is set to the number of z points
  (in display panel)

 Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[generator panel]


.312
TITLE: Command FR_CN

MEAN FREQ sets the mean frequency on @46[DFD] output
signals.

Selection from:  frequency value

Description:
    The UPL generates the two frequencies

             MEAN FREQ - @326[DIFF FREQ]
    and
             MEAN FREQ + @326[DIFF FREQ]


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.313
TITLE: Command: SR_FR_FL

SWEEP file for frequency

Selection from:  @9[filename]

Description:
    default file extension: *.spf







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.! SR1FRFL0 - SR1FRFL4
.319
TITLE: Command: SR1FR

FREQUENCY:  for @40[SINE], @42[SINE BURST], @43[SINEý BURST], @164[STEREO SINE],
                @165[CODED AUDIO]: Generator frequency
Freq No 1:  for @41[MULTISINE]:   Frequency No. 1
UPPER FREQ: for @26[MOD DIST]:    Weaker useful signal
Mod Freq:   for @52[MODULATION]:  Frequency of modulation
Freq Ch1:   for @164[STEREO SINE]: Frequency of left channel
            (if @299[Freq Mode] = FREQ CH1&2)
Jitt Freq:  frequency of injected jitter.

Selection from:  float value with the limits as shown in
                 the on-line help.

Description:
    The given frequency is set by means of with direct
    digital synthesis.

    When terminating the input with a softkey, the unit of
    the softkey is used.

Notes: - For @46[DFD], see @285[Mode].        
       - If the analyzer is set to @21[RMS], @539[Meas Time] GEN TRACK,
         the generator frequency is adjusted so that the
         analyzer can capture with an integer number of
         samples exactly a multiple of the period of the
         signal. Thus very fast and accurate measurements
         are possible, only the frequency of the
         generator is not exactly the set frequency.
         (Error max. 0.5%%).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]   @80[frequency units]


.320
TITLE: Command SR_FR_SC

Spacing defines how frequency SWEEP is to be scaled.

Selectable:  LIN POINTS, LIN STEPS, LOG POINTS, LOG STEPS

Description:
    LIN POINTS: linear scaling, @323[Points] different
                frequencies are generated
    LIN STEPS:  linear scaling, the difference between
                the steps is a constant @324[Frequency].
    LOG POINTS: logarithmic scaling, @323[Points]
                different frequencies are generated.
    LOG STEPS:  logarithmic scaling, the difference
                between the steps is a constant @324[Ratio].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.321
TITLE: Command: SR1FR_ST

Start sets the first value of a frequency sweep.

Selection from:  frequency value

Description:
    Pressing the @16[START] key starts the sweep with
    the first frequency value. The start value may be
    less or greater than the @322[stop] value.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.322
TITLE: Command: SR1FR_SP

Stop sets the end of the frequency sweep.

Selection from:  frequency value

Description:
    The stop value of the sweep may be greater or less
    than the @321[start value]. Stop is independent of
    @324[step] the last point of the sweep.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.323
TITLE: Command: SR_FR_PN

Points sets the count of points of the frequency sweep.

Selection from:  integer value: 2 .. 1024

Description:
    The sweep runs from @321[start] to @322[stop] with the
    given count of points (including both end points).






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]


.324
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_FR_SS

Step defines the LIN or LOG STEPS of a sweep for @320[Spacing].

Selectable:  LIN STEPS: Frequency entry
             LOG STEPS: Ratio entry

Description:
    The sweep is started at the given start frequency
    and is carried out with the given steps to the stop
    frequency. If the stop frequency is not quite reached,
    it will be set at the end.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.325
TITLE: Command: SR1FR2

Freq Ch2: Frequency of right channel
          (if @299[Freq Mode] = FREQ CH1&2)

Selection from:  float value with the limits as shown in
                 the on-line help.

Description:
    The given frequency is set by means of direct
    digital synthesis.


Note: If the analyzer is set to @21[RMS], @539[Meas Time] GEN TRACK, the 
      generator frequency is adjusted so that the analyzer 
      can capture with an integer number of samples 
      exactly a multiple of the period of the signal. 
      Thus very fast and accurate measurements are 
      possible, only the frequency of the generator is 
      not exactly the set frequency (Error max. 0.5%%).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]   @80[frequency units]


.326
TITLE: Command: FR_DL

DIFF FREQ sets the frequency difference of the two tones
generated in waveform @46[DFD].

Selection from:  frequency value

Description:
    see @312[MEAN FREQ]!






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.327
TITLE: Generator command SR_FR_QL

Setting sets the frequency precision of the Low Distortion
Generators (LDG).

Selection from:  FAST or PRECISION

Description:
    FAST:      The output frequency is set.
    PRECISION: The output frequency is set, measured and
               then corrected.

!-> @47[DIM] (analog) is only available with Option UPL-B1,
    Low Distortion Generator.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.328
TITLE: Generator Command SR1PH

"Phase No1"   sets the start phase of the first 
    @41[Multisinus] line;
"Phase Ch2:1" set the phase delay between right 
    and left @164[Stereo] channel.

Select from:  phase input

Description of multisine phase:
    The line is output starting with the specified phase;
    With 0 degree entered, the line starts with 0 and
    then rises.
    With 90 degrees entered, the line starts with the
    specified voltage and then falls.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.329
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR1VL

VOLTAGE sets the output level of the generator.

Selection from: @81[analogue units] or @82[digital units]
                depending on selected @102[generator].

Description:
    The output level is varied continuously without
    interrupting the signal.

Notes:
  - The maximum allowed level is defined with @133[Max Volt].
  - For digital instruments (@82[unit]: FS), the peak value
    rather than the rms value is set to facilitate the
    determination of the dynamic range of digital systems.
    The analyzer however measures the rms value so that a
    difference of û2 occurs.
  - For @52[FM]: setting the deviation in %%
  - For @52[AM]: setting the modulation depth in %%
  - For @164[STEREO SINE]: level of left channel
  - The reference resistance for unit dBm is 600ê.
    (0dBm = 1mW applied to 600ê, the source resistance is
    taken into account; i.e. the unloaded output voltage
    is adjusted so that voltage across the assumed load of
    600ê will be the desired voltage)

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]     @99[Units]


.330
TITLE: Command: SR2FR

Freq No 2:  for @41[MULTISINE]: frequency setting
LOWER FREQ: for @26[MOD DIST]:  low frequency
                           with high level
Carr Freq:  for @52[MODULATION]:frequency of carrier

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @319[first frequency]





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.331
TITLE: Generator Command SR2PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.332
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR2VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.333
TITLE: Command: SR3FR

Freq No 3:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @319[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.334
TITLE: Generator Command SR3PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.335
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR3VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.336
TITLE: Command: SR4FR

Freq No 4:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @319[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.337
TITLE: Generator Command SR4PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.338
TITLE: Command: SR4VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.339
TITLE: Command: SR5FR

Freq No 5:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @319[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.340
TITLE: Generator Command SR5PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.341
TITLE: Command: SR5VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.342
TITLE: Command: SR6FR

Freq No 6:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @319[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.343
TITLE: Generator Command SR6PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.344
TITLE: Command: SR6VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.345
TITLE: Command: SR7FR

Freq No  7:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.346
TITLE: Generator Command SR7PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.347
TITLE: Command: SR7VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.348
TITLE: Command: SR8FR

Freq No 8:    frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.349
TITLE: Generator Command SR8PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.350
TITLE: Command: SR8VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.351
TITLE: Command: SR9FR

Freq No 9:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.352
TITLE: Generator Command SR9PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.353
TITLE: Command: SR9VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.354
TITLE: Command: SR10FR

Freq No 10:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.355
TITLE: Generator Command SR10PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.356
TITLE: Command: SR10VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.357
TITLE: Command: SR11FR

Freq No 11:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.358
TITLE: Generator Command SR11PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.359
TITLE: Command: SR11VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.360
TITLE: Command: SR12FR

Freq No 12:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.361
TITLE: Generator Command SR12PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.362
TITLE: Command: SR12VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.363
TITLE: Command: SR13FR

Freq No 13:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.364
TITLE: Generator Command SR13PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.365
TITLE: Command: SR13VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.366
TITLE: Command: SR14FR

Freq No 14:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.367
TITLE: Generator Command SR14PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.368
TITLE: Command: SR14VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.369
TITLE: Command: SR15FR

Freq No 15:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.370
TITLE: Generator Command SR15PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.371
TITLE: Command: SR15VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.372
TITLE: Command: SR16FR

Freq No 16:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.373
TITLE: Generator Command SR16PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.374
TITLE: Command: SR16VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.375
TITLE: Command: SR17FR

Freq No 17:   frequency setting for @41[MULTISINE]

Selection from:  frequency value

Description: see setting of @306[first frequency]








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.376
TITLE: Generator Command SR17PH



    see @328[setting of first phase].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]


.377
TITLE: Command: SR17VL



    see @329[setting of first level].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.378
TITLE: Command: VL_TT_GN

TOTAL GAIN sets in conjunction with the @329[separate levels]
the output amplitude.

Selection from:  gain factor

Description:
    The output amplitude results in:
    level of individual sines * TOTAL GAIN.

    Additional information:
    TOTAL PEAK:   View of output peak value
    TOTAL RMS:    View of output rms value

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]   @41[Multisine]


.379
TITLE: Command VL_TT_RT

"Volt LF:HF" sets the level ratio between lower and 
    upper frequency for @45[MOD DIST];
"Volt Ch2:1" sets the level ration between right and 
    left channel of @164[STEREO SINE].

Selection from:  Ratio from 1:1 to 10:1 (MOD DIST)
                 Ratio from 0 to 100000 (STEREO SINE)





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR]


.380
TITLE: Command: VL_TT

Voltage Peak or TOTAL VOLT:
              output voltage of generator (peak value).

Selection from:  level setting

Description:
    total level for @50[Arbitrary waveform], @41[Multisinus],
    @48[Random], @156[RANDOM+ANLR], @46[DFD] and @45[MOD DIST].

    Sine level for @165[CODED AUDIO].

    DC output for @163[DC].




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]     @99[Units]


.381
TITLE: Command: SR1VL_RM

RMS value for signal @41[MULTISINE] and @48[RANDOM].

Selection from:  view only!

Description:
    appears only for analogue generators







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.382
TITLE: Command: SR_VL_FL

SWEEP filename for level

Selection from:  @9[filename]

Description:
    predefinded file extension: *.spv

Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.spv





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]


.! @383[SR_VLFL0] - SR_VLFL4
.383
TITLE: Application: Testing ADC MAX121

Test of the Maxim MAX121: UPD only












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @36[Applications]


.388
TITLE: Command: SR_VL_SC

Spacing defines how level SWEEP is to be scaled.

Selectable:  LIN POINTS, LIN STEPS, LOG POINTS, LOG STEPS

Description:
    LIN POINTS: linear scaling, @391[Points] different
                levels are generated
    LIN STEPS:  linear scaling, the difference between
                the steps is a constant @392[level].
    LOG POINTS: logarithmic scaling, @391[Points]
                different levels are generated.
    LOG STEPS:  logarithmic scaling, the difference
                between the steps is a constant @392[Ratio].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.389
TITLE: Command: SR1VL_ST

Start sets the first output of level sweep.

Selection from:  level setting

Description:
    On pressing the @16[START] key (or ctrl F5) the sweep
    starts with the given level. This level may be higher
    or lower than the @390[stop level].





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.390
TITLE: Command: SR1VL_SP

Stop sets the last level for a sweep.

Selection from:  level setting

Description:
    The stop level may be higher or lower than the
    @389[start level]. Stop is in every case the last level
    to be generated.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.391
TITLE: Command SR_VL_PN

Points set the count of output levels for the sweep.

Selection from:  integer 2 .. 1024

Description:
    The sweep runs from @389[start] to @390[stop] with the
    given count of points (including both end points).






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]


.392
TITLE: Command: SR_VL_SS

Step sets the change in sweep from one point to the next.

Selectable:  for LIN STEPS: level value
             for LOG STEPS: ratio

Description:
    The sweep starts at the given @389[start level]
    and runs with the set steps up or down to @390[stop level].
    If the stop level is not fully reached, it is
    set separately as last point of sweep.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.393
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_AM_MD

available only for generator functions @41[MULTISINE], @50[ARBITRARY]
and @48[RANDOM] (Frequency-@272[Domain]).
Selects how the total level of the signal is to be varied.

Selectable:  OFF, SINE, BURST

Description:
    OFF:   Variation turned off, generator signal 
           unmodified.
    SINE:  generator signal is sinesoid amplitude 
           modulated from 0%% down to -100%%
    BURST: generator signal is periodically switched
           on and off

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]        @92[GENERATOR panel]    @394[Mod Freq]    @395[Variation]
@400[On-Time]    @412[Interval]

.394
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_AM_FR

available only for generator functions @41[MULTISINE], @50[ARBITRARY]
and @48[RANDOM] (Frequency-@272[Domain]).
Modulation frequency (with Sinus-@393[Variation] selected)


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]    @393[Ampl Var]


.395
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR_AM_VL

Available only for generator functions @41[MULTISINE], @50[ARBITRARY]
and @48[RANDOM] (Frequency-@272[Domain]).
Variation in (0 .. -100) %%, the total signal is sinesoid reduced
(only with Sinus-@393[Variation] selected)


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[GENERATOR panel]    @393[Ampl Var]


.396
TITLE: Command: SR1VL_LW

Low Level command sets the lower level of the sine
amplitude with @42[SINE burst] on.

Selectable:  Level entry (absolute or relative)

Description:
 The lower level is set depending on the unit used:
 - for "normal" units:
   lower level is set as an absolute value.
 - for special units (%%on, dBon, V/on):
   the ratio of high level/low level remains constant.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]


.397
TITLE: GENERATOR command SR1VL2

Volt Ch2 sets the output level of the right channel.
Available only if @300[Volt Mode] is set to VOLT CH1&2
Selection from: @82[digital units]

Description:
    The output level is varied continuously without
    interrupting the signal.

Note: The maximum allowed level is defined with @133[Max Volt].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]     @99[Units]


.398
TITLE: Generator Command SR_LO_CH

@162[UPL16] only;
Specifying the analyzer channel whose signal is to be fed
back to the generator and superposed onto the noise signal.

Select from: OFF, 1, 2

  OFF: Feedback is switched off. Feedback amplification
       can be selected as a presetting even if loop is
       switched off.
  1:   Channel 1 is fed back.
  2:   Channel 2 is fed back.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]   @156[RANDOM+ANLR]


.399
TITLE: Generator Command SR_LO_GN

@162[UPL16] only; setting the feedback gain.

Select from: floating point factor or dB

Note:	As soon as "Volt Range" (in the GENERATOR panel)
        is switched to AUTO, loop gain is automatically
        set to 0 (muting).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator]   @156[RANDOM+ANLR]


.400
TITLE: Command: SR_ON

On-time sets the switch-on time of 
- bursts for @42[SINE BURST] and @43[SINEý BURST],
- burst-@393[Variation] for @41[MULTISINE], @50[ARBITRARY]
  and @48[RANDOM] (Frequency-@272[Domain]) 

Selectable:  Time in seconds
             for the sine bursts optionally in Cycles

Description:
    The signal is output during the on-time.
    The complete signal period can be set with @412[Interval].

    The on-time can be swept.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @92[Generator panel]


.401
TITLE: Command: SR_ON_FL

SWEEP file for burst duration

Selection from:  @8[DOS] @9[filename]

Description:
    default file extension: *.spo


Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.spo




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.! SR_ONFL0 - SR_ONFL4
.407
TITLE: Command: SR_ON_SC

Spacing defines how burst duration SWEEP is to be scaled.

Selectable:  LIN POINTS, LIN STEPS, LOG POINTS, LOG STEPS

Description:
    LIN POINTS: linear scaling, @410[Points] different
                durations are generated
    LIN STEPS:  linear scaling, the difference between
                the steps is a constant @411[time].
    LOG POINTS: logarithmic scaling, @410[Points]
                different durations are generated.
    LOG STEPS:  logarithmic scaling, the difference
                between the steps is a constant @411[Ratio].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.408
TITLE: Command: SR_ON_ST

Start sets the first duration of a burst duration sweep.

Selection from:  time value

Description:
    On pressing the @16[START] key (or ctrl F5) the sweep
    start with the given duration. The start duration may
    be longer or shorter than the @409[stop duration].





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[generator panel]


.409
TITLE: Command: SR_ON_SP

Stop sets the last duration of burst duration sweep.

Selection from:  time value

Description:
    The stop duration may be longer or shorter than the
    @408[start duration]. Stop is in every case the setting
    at the end of the sweep.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.410
TITLE: Command: SR_ON_PN

Points sets the count of points of the burst duration
sweep.

Selection from:  integer value 2 .. 1024

Description:
    The sweep runs from @408[start] to @409[stop] with the
    given count of points (including both end points).





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]


.411
TITLE: Command: SR_ON_SS

Step sets the change in sweep from one point to the next.

Selectable:  for LIN STEPS: time value
             for LOG STEPS: ratio

Description:
    The sweep starts at the given @408[start duration]
    and runs with the set steps up or down to
    @409[stop duration].
    If the stop duration is not fully reached, it is
    set separately as last point of sweep.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.412
TITLE: Command: SR_IV

Interval sets the period time of 
- burst signals (@42[SINE BURST] and @43[SINEý BURST])
- burst-@393[Variation] for @41[MULTISINE], @50[ARBITRARY]
  and @48[RANDOM] (Frequency-@272[Domain]) 

Selectable:  Time in seconds up to 60 s
             for the sine bursts optionally in Cycles



Description:
    The interval time must be longer than the @400[On-Time].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.413
TITLE: Command: SR_IV_FL

SWEEP file for burst intervals

Selection from:  @9[filename]

Description:
    default file extension: *.spi



Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.spi



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.! SR_IVFL0 - SR_IVFL4
.419
TITLE: Command: SR_IV_SC

Spacing defines how interval SWEEP is to be scaled.

Selectable:  LIN POINTS, LIN STEPS, LOG POINTS, LOG STEPS

Description:
    LIN POINTS: linear scaling, @422[Points] different
                intervals are generated
    LIN STEPS:  linear scaling, the difference between
                the steps is a constant @423[time].
    LOG POINTS: logarithmic scaling, @422[Points]
                different intervals are generated.
    LOG STEPS:  logarithmic scaling, the difference
                between the steps is a constant @423[Ratio].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.420
TITLE: Command: SR_IV_ST

Start sets the first value of a interval sweep.

Selection from:  time value

Description:
    Pressing the @16[START] key starts the sweep with
    the first interval value. The start value may be
    less or greater than the @421[stop] value.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.421
TITLE: Command: SR_IV_SP

Stop sets the last interval time of the sweep.

Selectable: time value

Description:
    The stop interval may be longer or shorter than the
    @420[start interval]. Stop is in every case the setting
    at the end of the sweep.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]


.422
TITLE: Command: SR_IV_PN

Points sets the count of points of the interval sweep.

Selection from:  integer value 2 .. 1024

Description:
    The sweep runs from @420[start] to @421[stop] with the
    given count of points (including both end points).






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[GENERATOR panel]


.423
TITLE: Command: SR_IV_SS

Step sets the change in sweep from one point to the next.

Selectable:  for LIN STEPS: time value
             for LOG STEPS: ratio

Description:
    The sweep starts at the given @420[start interval]
    and runs with the set steps up or down to
    @421[stop interval].
    If the stop level is not fully reached, it is
    set separately as the last point of sweep.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]


.424
TITLE: Generator-Command: SR_BO_DL

BurstOnDel sets an initial delay of the @42[Sine Burst].

Selectable: Time 0 .. 60s

Description:
    After the setup of the burst the given delay is
    inserted before the first 'ON'-cycle starts.

    A useful application is the measurement of the
    reaction on a burst e.g. with the function @614[WAVEFORM].
    In this case a value of approx. 30ms is recommended.
    The analyzer should run in SINGLE mode.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @92[Generator panel]    @42[Sine Burst]


.!--------------- ANA-Panel
.425
TITLE: ANALYZER command: AN_IN_SL

Selects the analyzer to be used for the measurement.

Selectable:  ANLG 22kHz, ANLG 110kHz, DIGITAL

Description:
    ANLG 22 kHz:  Measurement on analogue connector (XLR,
                  use an adapter for BNC), @441[sampling rate]
                  is 48 kHz, all @528[measurement functions]
                  are possible.
    ANLG 110 kHz: Measurement on analogue connector (XLR)
                  sampling rate is 307.200 kHz,
                  not all @528[measurement functions] are
                  possible.
                  Lower frequency limit: 20 Hz

    Notes:  A DC offset may become part of analog
            measurements. This can be minimized by means of
            the function @1105[CALIBRATION ANL] in @96[OPTIONS panel].

    DIGITAL:      Measurement on digital interface;
                  - UPL with Option UPL-B2 or UPL-B29:
                    @65[BAL (XLR)], @66[UNBAL (BNC)], @67[OPTICAL]
                    or @68[INTERN]) on front panel;
                    @441[Sampling rate] and @446[audio bits]
                    can be set,
                    all @528[measurement functions] are
                  - @162[UPL16]: @157[DAI interface] on rear panel,
                    8 kHz @441[Sampling rate] and 13 @446[Audio bits]
                    @77[coherence] and @503[phase and group delay]
                    measurement are not available.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @79[Settling]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.426
TITLE: Analyzer Command SN_DI_FD

Meas Mode determines the kind of measurements to be made in
the @93[analyzer].

Select from:  AUDIO DATA, JITTER/PHAS, COMMON/INP

Description:
  AUDIO DATA:  The audio content is measured.
  JITTER/PHAS: The demodulated jitter signal is measured.
               Frequency range: 0 ... 100kHz
               Test functions:  @30[FFT], @21[RMS],
                                peak-to-peak voltage
  COMMON/INP:  The common-mode signal of the digital input
               is measured. Frequency range and test
               functions as with jitter.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.427
TITLE: Analyzer Command SN_CO_SM

@162[UPL16] only; activates/deactivates A-Law coding simulation
for analyzer input.

Select from: PCM LINEAR, A-LAW SIMUL

Description:
  PCM LINEAR:  Coding simulation off;
               received signal remains 13 Bit PCM linear
               coded.
  A-LAW SIMUL: Received signal is fed through a A-law-
               coder/dekoder line before it is routed to
               the analyzer.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @104[Coding Generator]   @157[DAI]


.428
TITLE: Analyzer Command SN_JI_RS


z.Z. nicht freigeschaltet.











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.429
TITLE: ANALYZER command: IP_FRQMI

Min Freq command determines the lower frequency limit
of the @93[Analyzer].

Description:
    10 Hz: The input section is coupled to the DUT via the
        10-Hz highpass limit frequency. Ranger and
        functions are correspondingly adapted.
        This applies for ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL.
        
    20 Hz: The speed of the AUTO functions
        is adapted correspondingly.
        This applies for ANLG 110kHz.

Notes:  - The measurement range starts at higher
          frequencies for @24[THD] and @25[THD+N].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]    @35[Autorange]


.430
TITLE: ANALYZER command IP_RESIS

Ref Imped sets the calculation reference for power
measurements.

Selection from:   any resistance value

Description:   The given value is used when transforming
               measurement result to power units.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]   @81[Analogue units]


.431
TITLE: Command: IP_CHANL

Channel(s) selects the channels to be measured in the
@93[Analyzer].

Selection from:  1, 2, 1&2, 2ð1, 1ð2  or BOTH

Description:
    ANALOG:
        1:      Measurement of channel 1
        2:      Measurement of channel 2
        1&2:    Measurement of both channels, each channel
                is individually adjustable.
        2ð1:    Measurement of both channels, channel 2
                is identical to channel 1.
        1ð2:    Measurement of both channels, channel 1
                is identical to channel 1.

    DIGITAL:
        1:      Measurement of channel 1
        2:      Measurement of channel 2
        BOTH:   Measurement of both channels

Notes: - The full selection is not available on each @433[input].
         (see handbook).
       - The current selected input and channel may be
         displayed on the screen with the key @10[SHOW I/O].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.432
TITLE: Command: IP1COUPL

Selection from: AC, DC

Description:

  Selection of AC or DC coupling in channel 1
  If DC coupling is selected the DC voltage of DUT
  will be
  - graphically represented in analyzer function
    WAVEFORM and FFT
  - included in the measurement result of analyzer function
    PEAK & S/N, Q PK & S/N and RMS & S/N

  The analyzer function DC ignores this selection and
  internally switches to DC coupling.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.433
TITLE: Command: IP1CONNC

Ch1 Input command defines the input for the @93[analyzer].
This setting (and the selectable options) depends on
the @425[Analyzer used].

Selectable: Analog:       Digital:
            BAL           BAL, UNBAL, OPTICAL
            GEN CH2       @68[INTERN]
            GEN CROSSED

Description:
  Analogue inputs:
    BAL:        XLR connector (Studio socket) on the front
                panel of the UPL. The input is balanced. The
                @435[Input resistance] is selectable.
                Use an adapter for BNC. (UPL-Z1)
    GEN CH2:    Internal link to output 2 of generator.
    GEN CROSSED:Analyzer 1 connects to generator channel 2,
                analyzer 2 connects to generator channel 1.

  Digital inputs:
    @65[BAL]:      Digital input via XLR connector
    @66[UNBAL]:    Digital input via BNC connector
    @67[OPTICAL]:  Digital input via TOS-LINK
    @68[INTERN]:   Digital input via internal link to
                   @92[Generator]

Notes: - The currently selected input can be shown on
         the screen by means of key @10[SHOW I/O].
       - Display the used bits on digital inputs by
         setting @494[INPUT] to @495[BITS].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]   @4[Keys]   @801[Protocol analysis]


.434
TITLE: Generator Command SN_DI_SR

Jitter Ref determines the reference for jitter in the case
of jitter measurements.

Select from:  GEN CLK, VARI (PLL), 44.1 (PLL), 48.0 (PLL)
  UPL-B2  additionally 32.0 (PLL)
  UPL-B29 additionally 88.2 (PLL) and 96.0 (PLL)

Description:
  GEN CLK:  The generator clock is used as the reference
            for jitter measurements; this setting only
            appears if the parameter @110[Gen Sync]
            is set to GEN CLK. In this setting a lower
            measurement frequency of 10 Hz can be acheived.
  VARI (PLL): The conditioned signal from the @153[PLL] is used
            as the reference for jitter measurements.
  32.0, 44.1, 48.0, 88.2, 96.0 (PLL): Same as AUTO, but the
            @153[PLL] is forced to lock with corresponding
            crystal oszillator.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.435
TITLE: Command: IP1IMPED

Ch1 Imped set the termination resistance on input.

Selection from:    300 ê, 600 ê, 200 kê

Description:
  ANALOG:
    300ê, 600ê, 200 kê: The @433[BAL] input is terminated
        with the selected resistance. 300ê and 600ê are
        DC coupled and remain connected even after turning
        off the inputs.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.436
TITLE: Command: IP1COMMN

Ch1 Common sets the ground connection of channel 1.

Selection from:  GROUND or FLOAT

Description:
  If a external BNC-Adapter is used the grounding of the
  input may be selected:

  GROUND: Pin 1 of XLR connector is grounded. The adapter
          (UPL-Z1) shortens pins 1 and 3 and connects them
          to the outer lead of the BNC.
  FLOAT:  Pin 1 is not grounded.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.437
TITLE: Command: IP1RNG

Range sets the range selection mode in channel 1.

Selectable:  AUTO, FIX: or LOWER:

Description:
    AUTO:  The UPL attempts to find the optimal
           measurement range.
    FIX:   The measurement range is specified by the
           @438[following command]. An over- or underrange
           of the selected range is indicated in
           @7[instrument status] at the top in @3[screen].
    LOWER: as for AUTO, however smaller measurement
           ranges as in the @438[following command] are not used.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]    @35[Autorange]


.438
TITLE: Command: IP1RNGVL

Selection of a measurement range either as fixed range
(@437[Range] set to FIX) or as lower limit for the auto
ranging feature (@437[Range] set to LOWER).

Selection from:  18 mV, 300 mV,    6 V,   100V
                 30 mV, 600 mV,   10 V
                 60 mV,   1  V,   18 V
                100 mV, 1.8  V,   30 V
                180 mV,   3  V    60 V

Description:
    The measurement range related to the rms value of the
    input signal. Input signals with greater ratio peak/rms
    require the next range.

Note: only the following ranges are available for DC
    measurements; if an unsuitable range is selected the
    next higher available range is used.
    Ranges available for DC:
        100mV, 300mV, 1V, 3V, 10V, 30V, 100V

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]    @35[auto range]   @437[range mode]


.439
TITLE: Analyzer Command SN_DI_SS

Sync To determines the synchronization of the digital
input.

Selectable: AUDIO IN, REF IN

Description:
  AUDIO IN:   The receiver is clocked with the input
              signal (normal operation).
  REF IN:     The receiver is clocked with the reference
              clock, which is recovered with the @153[PLL].
              (see also @440[Sync To]).


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.440
TITLE: Generator Command SN_DI_SM

Sync To sets the type of clock source to SYNC IN if @439[Anl Sync] 
is selected.

Select from: VIDEO 50, VIDEO 60, WORD CLK, WRD CLK INV,
             1024kHz

Description:
  VIDEO 50:    The analyzer sampling rates 32kHz, 44.1kHz
               and 48kHz are synchronized with the video
               repetition rate of 50Hz.
  VIDEO 60:    same as above, however for 60Hz (NTSC).
  WORD CLK:    The analyzer is directly synchronized with
               the applied word clock. see @153[PLL].
  WRD CLK INV: same as above, however the inverted input is 
               used for synchronization.
  1024kHz:     Synchronization to an "in-house" clock, e.g.
               for DAB

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @153[PLL]


.441
TITLE: Command: IP_SMFRQ

Sample Frq sets the sampling rate.

Selectable:  44.1kHz, 48kHz, VALUE, AUTO, CHAN STATUS
  UPL-B2 : additionally 32 kHz;
  UPL-B29: additionally 88.2kHz and 96 kHz
  @162[UPL16]:   only 8 kHz available

Description: The given frequencies is used for internal
             calculations. However the analyzer will always
             sync to the measurement signal even if it
             doesn't match this sampling rate.
       AUTO: The sample rate is measured and then copied
             to the next menu line. If the sample rate
             changes more then 100ppm, the value is
             updated. While no input clock detected the 
             @442[VALUE] remains unchanged.
       CHAN STATUS: The value is taken from the information
             of the channel status bits.
       8 kHz:@162[UPL16] (read only): The GSM DAI works on a
             fix sample rate of 8 kHz.

Important:
    - The clocking of the analyzer is always external!
    - The set sampling rate is used as a basis for the
      frequency measurement and filter calculation; it
      should thus be accurately set.
    - The maximum sampling rate of the analyzer may not be
      exceeded by more than 10%% (generates @7[status message]
      ANL 1: ORUN)

Notes: The sampling rates of the analogue analyzers are:
    ANLG 22 kHz:     48.000 kHz
    ANLG 110 kHz:   307.200 kHz

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]   @804[Rate Measurement AES/EBU]


.442
TITLE: Command: IP_SMFVL

Value allows any external sampling rate to be set. It
should be observed that the sampling rate should not
exceed that of the selected analyzer by more than 2%% .

Selectable:  user-selectable frequency

Description:
    see @441[Sample frq]!

    (Output clocks are turned off.)



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.443
TITLE: Command: IP_OVSMP

UPD only


.444
TITLE: Command: IP_WRDLN

Wordlength sets the number of data bits per sample.

Selectable:  8, 16, 24, 32

Description:
    The weighting of the bits is determined by the setting
    of @445[Wordoffset].
    The bit rate is calculated from the @441[Sampling rate],
    the information whether multiplexing on two channels
    is required and from the word length.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]   @62[SERIAL]   @37[IýS]


.445
TITLE: Command: IP_WRDOF

Wordoffset specifies the position of the sync pulse
relative to the start of the data word.

Selectable:  Any number in the range from -@444[Wordlength]/2
            to +Wordlength/2

Description:
    Entering 0 means that the sync pulse is to be expected
    exactly one clock before the data. Positive setting
    shifts the sync pulse towards the word, for negative
    settings the pulse occurs further away from the data.

Example 1: (Offset = 0)
               |<-------- Data word ------------>|
    Data:     +-+  +-+++  +-+  +-+   +-+  +-+  ++
           +--+ +--+ +++--+ +--+ +---+ +--+ +--++----+
    Sync:     ++                                ++
           ---++--------------------------------++-----

Example 2: (Offset = 3)
               |<-------- Data word ------------>|
    Data:     +-+  +-+++  +-+  +-+   +-+  +-+  ++
           +--+ +--+ +++--+ +--+ +---+ +--+ +--++----+
    Sync:        ++                                ++
           ------++--------------------------------++--

Notes:
- When the received digital signal is between 0.5 and
  1.0 FS, a 'clean' spectrum can only be obtained if the
  word offset is correctly set.
- If less bits per sample are offered to the UPL than
  selected in @444[Wordlength], the offset value must be
  corrected by count of the missing bits.
  (i.e. 20 bit in 24 bit-mode: Offset = -5 instead -1);

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]   @62[SERIAL]   @37[IýS]


.446
TITLE: Command: IP_AUDBT

Audio Bits command sets the number of bits to be evaluated
at a digital interface.

Selectable:  8 to 24

Description:
    The specified number of audio bits are coupled out of
    the data stream and taken into account in the measure-
    ment. The remaining bits are filled up with 0's.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.447
TITLE: Command: IP_WRDSL

Wordsel Ch1 sets the level on line LRSELECT, which signals
channel 1.

Selection from:  HIGH or LOW

Description:
    This selection is only available for @61[SERIAL-MUX]
    and @63[PARALLEL-MUX].

    HIGH:   channel 1 is measured at high level of LRSELECT
    LOW:    channel 1 is measured at low level of LRSELECT


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.448
TITLE: Command: IP_WRDCL

Word Clock sets the edge, which clocks the input data into
the @93[analyzer].

Selectable:  RISING or FALLING

Description: RISING:  Data is clocked on the rising edge.
             FALLING: Data is clocked on the falling edge.


Note:  - When problems arise in data transmission:
         ù terminate lines at the input connector
         ù change clocking edge
       - apply data MSB justified

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]   @62[SERIAL]


.449
TITLE: Command IP_BITCL

Bit Clock sets the edge, which clocks the input data into
the @93[analyzer].

Selectable:  RISING or FALLING

Description: RISING:  Data is clocked on the rising edge.
             FALLING: Data is clocked on the falling edge.


Note:  - When problems arise in data transmission:
         ù terminate lines at the input connector
         ù change clocking edge

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]   @62[SERIAL]


.450
TITLE: Command: IP_DTFRM
|--------------------- lineal -----------------------------|

data format: not yet implemented!

Selection from:

Description:






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.451
TITLE: ANALYZER command IP_ORDER

Bit Order command defines the timing sequence of the data
bits.

Selectable:  MSB FIRST, LSB FIRST

Description:
  MSB FIRST: The MSB appears before the LSB in a data
             transfer.
  LSB FIRST: The MSB appears after the LSB in a data
             transfer.
        !->  When LSB FIRST is selected, it is absolutely
             necessary to specify the @446[Bits] actually
             used so that the bits may be arranged in
             the right order.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]   @62[SERIAL]


.452
TITLE: Command PR_GENER

Result Protocol: General Error
.453
TITLE: Command PR_PARER

Result Protocol: Parity Errors
.454
TITLE: Command PR_CRLER

Result Protocol: CRC Errors Left
.455
TITLE: Command PR_CRRER

Result Protocol: CRC Errors Right
.456
TITLE: Command PR_CHANG

Result Protocol: Change Flag ChanST
.457
TITLE: Command PR_OSIDE

Result Protocol: Other Side
.458
TITLE: Command PR_VALIL

Result Protocol: Validity Left
.459
TITLE: Command PR_VALIR

Result Protocol: Validity Right
.460
TITLE: Command PR_CHSL0

Result Protocol Channel Status L0
.461
TITLE: Command PR_CHSL1

Result Protocol Channel Status L1
.462
TITLE: Command PR_CHSL2

Result Protocol Channel Status L2
.463
TITLE: Command PR_CHSL3

Result Protocol Channel Status L3
.464
TITLE: Command PR_CHSL4

Result Protocol Channel Status L4
.465
TITLE: Command PR_CHSL5

Result Protocol Channel Status L5
.466
TITLE: Command PR_CHSR0

Result Protocol Channel Status R0
.467
TITLE: Command PR_CHSR1

Result Protocol Channel Status R1
.468
TITLE: Command PR_CHSR2

Result Protocol Channel Status R2
.469
TITLE: Command PR_CHSR3

Result Protocol Channel Status R3
.470
TITLE: Command PR_CHSR4

Result Protocol Channel Status R4
.471
TITLE: Command PR_CHSR5

Result Protocol Channel Status R5
.472
TITLE: Command: IP2COUPL

Selection from: AC, DC

Description:

  Selection of AC or DC coupling in channel 2
  If DC coupling is selected the DC voltage of DUT
  will be
  - graphically represented in analyzer function
    WAVEFORM and FFT
  - included in the measurement result of analyzer function
    PEAK & S/N, Q PK & S/N and RMS & S/N

  The analyzer function DC ignores this selection and
  internally switches to DC coupling.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.473
TITLE: Command: IP2CONNC

Ch2 Input command defines the input for the analyzer. This
setting and the selectable options depend on the @425[Analyzer]
used.

Selectable: Analog:           Digital:
            BAL               @65[BAL],  @66[UNBAL],   @67[OPTICAL],
            GEN CH1           @68[INTERN]
            GEN CROSSED
                              
Description:
  see @433[Ch1 Input].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]   @4[Keys]


.474
TITLE: Command: IP2IMPED

Ch2 Imped set the termination resistance on input 2.

Selection from:  300 ê, 600 ê, 200 kê

Description:
    300 ê, 600 ê, 200 kê:
        The @433[BAL] input is terminated with the selected
        resistor. 300ê and 600ê are DC coupled and
        remain connected even after turning off the inputs.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.475
TITLE: Command: IP2COMMN

Ch2 Common sets the ground connection of channel 2.

Selection from:  GROUND or FLOAT

Description:
  If a external BNC-Adapter is used the grounding of the
  input may be selected:

  GROUND: Pin 1 of XLR connector is grounded. The adapter
          (UPL-Z1) shortens pins 1 and 3 and connects them
          to the outer lead of the BNC.
  FLOAT:  Pin 1 is not grounded.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.476
TITLE: Command: IP2RNG

Range sets the measurement range of channel 2.

Selection from:
    see @437[setting of channel 1].

Description:
    see @437[setting of channel 1].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]    @35[auto range]


.477
TITLE: Command: IP2RNGVL

Selection of a measurement range either as fixed range
(@476[Range] set to FIX) or as lower limit for the auto
ranging feature (@476[Range] set to LOWER).

Selection from:  18 mV, 300 mV,    6 V
                 30 mV, 600 mV,   10 V
                 60 mV,   1  V,   18 V
                100 mV, 1.8  V,   30 V
                180 mV,   3  V    

Description:
    The measurement range related to the rms value of the
    input signal. Input signal with greater peak/rms ratio
    require the next range.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]    @35[Auto range]


.478
TITLE: Command SC_SOURC

START COND sets the condition for the start of measurement.

Selection from:  AUTO,
                 TIME TICK,   TIME CHART,
                 FREQ CH1,    FREQ CH2,
                 FRQ FST CH1, FRQ FST CH2,
                 LEVEL CH1,   LEVEL CH2,
                 LEV TRG CH1, LEV TRG CH2,
                 EDG TRG CH1, EDG TRG CH2

Description:
  AUTO:
    The measurement is started on every @93[ANALYZER] or
    @92[GENERATOR] setting and is run continuously.
  TIME TICK:
    The measurement is started in equidistant time
    intervals.
    The intervals can be set with @480[Timetick].
    @481[Points] gives the number of measurements.
    If the measurement cannot be completed in the
    given interval, the interval is lengthened until the
    measurement terminates. The result is recorded with
    the correct time.
  TIME CHART:
    The measurement is run continuously. Values (which may
    be intermediate results, i.e. @23[QUASI PEAK] readings)
    are read in equidistant time intervals which can be
    set with @480[Timetick].
    These values may be displayed as CURVE or BARGRAPH.
    Use this setting to display the running in of a DUT.
    Notes:
    -  This is the only START condition which can display
       intermediate results.
    -  If there is no new (intermediate) measurement
       result available, the last one is used once more.
    -  @481[Points] gives the number of measurements.
  FREQ CH1, FREQ CH2:
    The measurement is recorded only if the frequency value
    is between @483[Start] and @484[Stop], the frequency variation
    relative to the last measurement is more than @485[Variation]
    and the RMS value of the signal is more than @482[Min Volt].
    Frequency variations of more than @485[Variation] in the
    direction from @484[Stop] towards @483[Start] are interpreted
    as follows:
    - continous sweeps: retrace event
    - single sweep:     ignored
    Values beyond the @484[Stop] value are interpreted as
    follows:
    - continous sweeps: ignored
    - single sweep:     terminates sweep
  FRQ FST CH1, FRQ FST CH2:
    Like FREQ CH1, FREQ CH2 with a fast frequency measure-
    ment.
  LEVEL CH1, LEVEL CH2:
    The measurement is recorded only if the level value is
    between @486[Start] and @487[Stop] and the level variation
    relative to the last measurement is more than
    @488[Variation].
    Level variations of more than @488[Variation] in the
    direction from @487[Stop] towards @486[Start] are interpreted
    as follows:
    - continous sweeps: retrace event
    - single sweep:     ignored
    Values beyond the @487[Stop] value are interpreted as
    follows:
    - continous sweeps: ignored
    - single sweep:     terminates sweep
  LEV TRG CH1, LEV TRG CH2: (only for single shots)
    The measurement is triggered if the selected input
    signal enters the level range between @486[Start] and @487[Stop]
    for the first time. For a new trigger the signal must
    once have been outside the given range. Between the 
    entering of the range and the actual start of the
    measurement a @479[Delay] may be given.
  EDG TRG CH1, EDG TRG CH2:
    edge sensitive triggering
    Measured value triggering ("single shot") because of a
    detected voltage edge at analyzer channel 1 or 2,
    respectively. The measured values are not transferred
    to the trace buffers thus no curve plot will be
    performed. Using the @16[START] or @18[SINGLE] key, level
    monitoring is started but will not be armed before any
    level out of the range between start and stop is
    detected. The trigger condition is fulfilled, if the
    level enters the range between @486[Start] and @487[Stop]
    for the first time.
    Thereupon - considering the @479[Delay] - a single
    measurement will be started.
    If continuous trigger has been started (via @16[START] key)
    another trigger in this range will not be performed
    until the level has left this range. Hence, the trigger
    is rearmed when a level is detected outside the
    specified range.

 -> The function @614[Waveform] comes with an own independent
    trigger.

Note:
  - Every START COND except AUTO uses the SWEEP system.
  - With IEC software installed and used TIME TICK and
    TIME CHART will have lower accuracy. If IEC remote is
    not used, it is recommended to choose an UPL configu-
    ration without IEC control (run @1202[UPLSET] and
    choose from the @8[DOS] environment an configuration
    unequal 2).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.479
TITLE: Command: SC_DELAY

Delay sets the interval before the measurement start.

Selectable:  time value

Description:
    This interval is the time between the setting (i.e.
    manual or sweep) or the fulfill of the start condition
    and the start of the measurement.

Applications:
    - settling of DUT
    - cancelling of a dead time (i.e. tape measurements or
      digital systems)

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @478[START COND]


.480
TITLE: Command: SC_TIMTK

Timetick sets the period for measurement starts.

Selectable: time value in sec.

Description:
    The next measurement will be started after expire of
    the period.
    Only for:  @478[START COND] = TIME TICK or
                                  TIME CHART

    The product of @480[Timetick] and @481[points] is the
    total measurement time.

    See also notes on @23[QUASI PEAK].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @478[START COND]


.481
TITLE: Command: SC_POINT

Points sets the count of measurements.

Selection from:  integer value 2 .. 1024

Description:
    Only for @478[START COND] = TIME

    The product of @480[Timetick] and points is the
    total measurement time.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @478[START COND]


.482
TITLE: Command: SC_MINRM

Min RMS sets the level, above which measured values
are to be recorded.

Selection from:  level value

Description:
    Only input signals, which are greater than this
    value fulfill the start condition.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]


.483
TITLE: Command: SC_FRQST

Start sets the lower frequency limit for external sweep

Selectable:   any frequency value

Description:
    Only input signal with a frequency between this
    value and @484[Stop] fulfill the start condition.

Note: Start should be a little bit smaller then the
    expected range.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]


.484
TITLE: Command: SC_FRQSP

Stop sets the upper frequency limit for external sweep

Selectable:   any frequency value

Description:
    Only input signal with a frequency between @483[Start]
    and this value fulfill the start condition.
    Values beyond this value are:
    - continous sweeps: ignored
    - single sweep:     interpreted as sweep end.

Notes:
    - Stop should be a little bit more than the
      expected input range (for continous sweeps)
    - Stop should be a little bit less than the
      expected input range (for single sweeps)

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]


.485
TITLE: Command: SC_FRQVR

Variation sets the minimal change in frequency for external
sweep.

Selectable:   percent value

Description:
    Only input signals with a frequency deviation of more
    than this value fulfill the start condition.

    In every case the frequency must be between @483[Start]
    and @484[Stop].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]


.486
TITLE: Command: SC_RMSST

Start sets the lower level limit for external sweep.

Selectable:   any level value

Description:
    Only input signal with a level between this
    value and @487[Stop] fulfill the start condition.

Note: Start should be a little bit smaller then the
    expected range.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]


.487
TITLE: Command: SC_RMSSP

Stop sets the upper level limit for external sweep

Selectable:   any level value

Description:
    Only input signal with a level between @486[Start]
    and this value fulfill the start condition.

    Values beyond this value are:
    - continous sweeps: ignored
    - single sweep:     interpreted as sweep end.

Notes:
    - Stop should be a little bit more than the
      expected input range (for continous sweeps)
    - Stop should be a little bit less than the
      expected input range (for single sweeps)

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]


.488
TITLE: Command: SC_RMSVR

Variation sets the minimal change in level for external
sweep.

Selectable:   percent value

Description:
    Only input signals with a level deviation of more
    than this value fulfill the start condition.

    In every case the level must be between @486[Start]
    and @487[Stop].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]


.489
TITLE: Command: SC_TIMOU
|-------------!!!----- lineal ----------------------------|
time-out external sweep

Selectable:

Description:
    Sorry, help to this item not yet implemented!







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]


.490
TITLE: Command: SC_SETTL

Settling implements a filter for the start condition.

Selectable: OFF, EXP, FLAT

Description:
    OFF:         no settling
    EXPONENTIAL: Exponential curve for tolerance and
                 resolution values.
    FLAT:        horizontal curve for tolerance and
                 resolution values.

Notes:
- The following setting sets the number of considered
  @491[samples].
- Settling is only active, if the measurement values are
  inside a @493[resolution] area.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @79[Settling]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @478[START COND]


.491
TITLE: Command: SC_SESMP

Samples sets the count of measurement which should be
considered in the settling algorithm. (including
the last measurement).

Selectable:  integer 2 .. 6


Description:
    Example: A value of 3 means that the current measure-
             ment result is compared to the two preceding
             ones.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]    @490[Settling]


.492
TITLE: Command: SC_SETOL

Tolerance sets the starting width of @490[settling].

Selectable: percent or dB value.

Description:
    Tolerance gives the max. allowable deviation of the
    current measurement value related to the previous one.
    Only results with a smaller deviation as tolerance
    are marked as valid. The allowed deviation related
    to older results (2,3,4,5) depends on the setting
    of EXPONENTIAL | FLAT.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]  @490[settling]


.493
TITLE: Command: SC_SERES

Resolution sets the starting width of the resolution curves

Selectable: Value given in the @99[Unit] of the current
function.

Description:
    If a value is outside of the tolerance curve, the
    resolution curve sets the measurement value which must
    not be exceeded to violate the settling rule. Smaller
    values than the given resolution are accepted always.

    See manual, chapter 2.3.

Note: Menuitem appears only if @490[settling] is set to
         EXP or FLAT.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @478[START COND]


.494
TITLE: ANALYZER command PK_MEASM

Input selects the display of the input meter.

Selectable:  OFF, PEAK, RMS or PHAS TO REF

Description:
    OFF:  No display
    PEAK: Display of the @34[Input peak], measured directly at
          the converter output/digital interface. This
          indicates the input signal range of the system
          independent of the shape of the signal.
          If @426[Jitter/Phas] is measured, the peak amplitude
          of the digital input signal will be displayed.
    RMS:  During @24[THD] and @25[THD+N]
.!        @26[MOD DIST], @27[DIM], @28[DFD] and @30[FFT]
          the rms-value at the input is shown.
.!    @495[BITS]: When a digital instrument is selected, the
.!          activity of the input bits is displayed.
    PHAS TO REF: If @426[Jitter/Phas] is measured, the current
          frame phase will be displayed.

Note:  The display unit for channel 1 is selectable with
       @497[Unit Ch1]. (for channel 2 : @498[Unit Ch2]).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.! 405 Command: PK_ITVTM:  Interval, intern only
.495
TITLE: ANALYZER bit activity display

With the selection of @494[Input] as BITS a graphic display
of the active bits is generated.
(only for digital instruments).

Meaning:
 +-+
 Ý_Ý:  The corresponding bit stucks at 0.
 +-+
 +-+
 ÝîÝ:  The corresponding bit stucks at 1.
 +-+
 +-+
 ÝÝÝ:  The corresponding bit toggles in the considered
 +-+   interval.

The top 24 bit are displayed (starting at the MSB).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @3[screen]


.496
TITLE: Command: PK_ITMVL

Werteingabe, intern only!

.497
TITLE: Command: PK1UNIT

Unit Ch1 command sets the display unit for the peak of
channel 1.

Selectable:   @82[Digital] or @81[Analog] units
              depending on the used @425[analyzer].

Description:  The selected unit is used in the upper
              @3[Result window] (center) as well as
              in the @91[DISPLAY panel] for pre-setting
              the graphic labelling.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.498
TITLE: ANALYZER command PK2UNIT

see @497[Unit Pk1] !












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.499
TITLE: Command PK_REFMD

Reference sets the reference value for the relative
indication of @34[Input peaks].

Selectable:   VALUE, OTHER CHN, STORE CH1, STORE CH2

Description:
    VALUE:      The value set with @500[following input]
                is used as reference value.
    GEN TRACK:  The currently used @92[generator] output level
                (RMS resp. PEAK) is used as reference value
    MEAS CH1, CH2:  The current measurement value of the
                given channel is used as reference value.
    STORE CH1:  The current measurement value of channel 1
                is used as reference value.
    STORE CH2:  The current measurement value of channel 2
                is used as reference value.

Get more help about:
.! @1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @99[Units]   @1005[Conv Fact]
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @99[Units]


.500
TITLE: Command: PK_REFVL

Setting of the @499[Reference] of the @34[Input peaks]-display

Selectable:    level value

Description:
    This value (given in @82[digital units] or
    @81[analogue units], depending on selected @425[analyzer]),
    is used as reference for relative measurements.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.501
TITLE: Command: SN2_DAT1

Peak Result Ch1

.502
TITLE: Command: SN2_DAT2

Peak Result Ch2

.503
TITLE: Command: FP_MEASM

FREQ/PHAS sets the mode of frequency or phase measurements.

Selectable:     OFF, FREQ, FREQ&PHASE, FREQ&GRPDEL,
                SAMPLE FREQ

Description:
    OFF:        no frequency measurement
    FREQ:       frequency measurement (on one or both
                channels)
    FREQ&PHASE: frequency and phase measurement
    FREQ&GRPDEL:frequency and group delay measurement
    SAMPLE FREQ:The sample rate at the digital input is
                measured.

Note:
    Phase and group delay measurement is available in
    2-channel analog and digital measurement only for
    analyzer function @20[RMS], @25[THD+N/SINAD], OFF and
    @30[FFT] (with suitable @586[window]).

    @162[UPL16]: Via DAI interface (digital analyzer)
    phase or group delay measurement is no available
    thus it is a 1 channel analyzer.

    The digital phase measurement is done with the @30[FFT]
    or @584[Post-FFT]. Therefore the measurement time depends on
    the selected @585[FFT size].
    @590[Zoom] should be turned off or set to factor 2.

    HANN and RIFE VINC 1-3 are suitable for phase
    measurement.

    Group delay measurement is defined for frequency
    variation only (e.g. frequency sweeps). So group delay
    measurement fails if frequency result of 2 consecutive
    measurements is constant.

    The frame phase on digital inputs can be displayed with
    with the @494[Input/Phas] command.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]    @804[Rate measurement on Dig Audio]


.504
TITLE: Command: FQ_MEATM

Meas Time sets the measurement time and precision of the
frequency measurement for the analyzer functions OFF and
RMS. Does not influence the other measurement functions.

Selectable:    FAST, PRECISION

Description:
    FAST:      The frequency measurement is set to attain
               optimum speed:
               RMS: Frequency measurement may be performed
                    without post FFT; the frequency is
                    determined on the basis of the number
                    of zero crossings, unless the user
                    actually switches on post FFT.
               OFF: Frequency and phase/group delay
                    measurement is performed at reduced
                    @585[FFT size] (4 k FFT) and without
                    @590[zooming], which makes it about four
                    times faster than PRECISION measurement.
    PRECISION: The frequency measurement is set to attain
               optimum precision:
               RMS: Post FFT (8 k FFT, without zoom) is
                    switched on automatically to obtain a
                    more precise measurement result.
               OFF: Frequency and phase/group delay
                    measurement is performed at maximum
                    @585[FFT size] and with @590[zoom] (factor 2)
                    switched on. For low frequencies an
                    additional measurement is performed
                    using an increased zoom factor.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.505
TITLE: Command: FQ_MTMVL

Value sets the frequency measurement time.

Selectable: time value

Description:
    Accuracy increases with longer measurement times.
    see @504[Meas Time].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.506
TITLE: Command: FQ1UNIT

Unit Ch1 sets the display unit for frequency measurement.

Selectable:  Hz, ëHz, ë%%Hz, Toct, Oct, Dec, f/fr

Description:    See @80[Frequency units]!








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @84[Phase units]


.507
TITLE: Command: FQ2UNIT

Unit Ch2 sets the display unit for frequency.

Selectable:  Hz, ëHz, ë%%Hz, Toct, Oct, Dec, f/fr

Description:
    See @506[Unit Ch1]!







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]     @80[Frequency units]    @84[Phase units]


.508
TITLE: Command: PH_UNIT

Sets the display unit for phase and group delay measurment.

Selectable:  FREQ&
                PHASE:  ø, RAD, ëø, ëRAD
                GRPDEL: s, ës

Description:
    see @80[frequency units] or @84[phase units]!






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.509
TITLE: Command: FQ_REFMD

Ref Freq sets the reference frequency for frequency
measurements.

Selection from:  MEAS CH1, MEAS CH2, GEN TRACK,
                 STORE CH1, STORE CH2, STORE, VALUE:

Description:
    MEAS CH1, MEAS CH2: The selected channel is used
            (online) as reference.
    GEN TRACK: The currently set generator frequency is
            used as reference.
    STORE CH1, STORE CH2, STORE:
            The currently measured frequency is stored and
            is used for further measurements as reference.
    VALUE:  Setting of a reference with the following
            @510[Input].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @80[Frequency units]


.510
TITLE: Command: FQ_REFVL

Setting of a reference frequency for relative frequency
units

Selectable:  any frequency value

Description:
    see @80[Frequency units and display]!






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.511
TITLE: Command: PH_MEAMD

Format Phase sets the display range of phase measurement.

Selectable:  0..360ø, -360..0ø, -180..+180ø or INFINITE

Description:
    0 .. 360ø:   The discontinuity is at 0ø; -1ø is
                 displayed as 359ø.
    -360 .. 0ø:  The discontinuity is at 0ø; +1ø is
                 displayed as -359ø.
    -180..+180ø: The range about 0ø is continuous.
    INFINITE:    Continuous phase representation
                 without discontinuity; reset
                 by using START key

Use this command to avoid "jumping" of the phase display.

Note:
    Continuous phase representation needs phase steps of
    less than 180ø.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]   @84[Phase units]


.512
TITLE: Command: PH_REFMD

Ref Freq sets the reference phase for relative phase
units.

Selectable:  STORE, VALUE:

Description:
    STORE:  The currently measured phase is stored as
            reference phase.
    VALUE:  Setting of a reference phase with the
            following @513[input].



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @84[Phase units]


.513
TITLE: Command: PH_REFVL

Value for @512[Reference].

Selectable:  phase value

Description:
    Relative units relates to this setting.







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @84[Phase units]


.514
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FQ_SETTL

Settling implements a "filter" for the frequency
measurement.

Selectable: OFF, EXP, FLAT, AVERAGE

Description:
    OFF:         no settling
    EXPONENTIAL: Exponential curve for tolerance and
                 resolution values.
    FLAT:        horizontal curve for tolerance and
                 resolution values.
    AVERAGE:     @147[Arithmetic averaging] of all measurement
                 results.

  - When using external frequency as @478[START COND]
    frequency settling is not selectable. The frequency
    result of the starting condition is used instead.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @79[Settling]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.515
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FQ_SESMP

Samples sets the count of measurement which should be
considered in the settling or @147[average algorithm]
(including the last measurement).

Selectable:  integer 2 .. 6   (settling)
                     2 .. 100 (average)

Description:
    Example for settling:
             A value of 3 means that the current measure-
             ment result is compared to the two preceding
             ones.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @514[Settling]


.516
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FQ_SETOL

Tolerance sets the starting width of @490[settling].

Selectable: percent or dB value.

Description:
    Tolerance gives the max. allowable deviation of the
    current measurement value related to the previous one.
    Only results with a smaller deviation as tolerance
    are marked as valid. The allowed deviation related
    to older results (2,3,4,5) depends on the setting
    of EXPONENTIAL | FLAT.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @514[Settling]


.517
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FQ_SERES

Resolution sets the starting width of the resolution
curves.

Selectable: Value given in the @99[Hz].

Description:
    If a value is outside of the tolerance curve, the
    resolution curve sets the measurement value which must
    not be exceeded to violate the settling rule. Smaller
    values than the given resolution are accepted always.

    See manual, chapter 2.3.

Note: Menuitem appears only if @514[settling] is set to
         EXP or FLAT.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @514[Settling]


.518
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FQ_SETOU

Timeout sets the maximum allowed time for @514[settling]
of the frequency measurement.

Selectable:   time value given in seconds.

Description:
    If the frequency values do not settle in the
    given time, the measurement is terminated and
    the result is marked as void.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @514[Settling]


.519
TITLE: Analyzer Command: PH_SETTL

Settling implements a "filter" for the phase measurements.

Selectable:
    OFF:         no settling
    EXPONENTIAL: Exponential curve for tolerance and
                 resolution values.
    FLAT:        horizontal curve for tolerance and
                 resolution values.
    AVERAGE:     @147[Arithmetic averaging] of all measurement
                 results.

Description:
- The count of considered values is set with @520[samples].
- @522[Timeout] sets the max. allowed time for settling.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @79[Settling]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.520
TITLE: Analyzer Command: PH_SESMP

Samples sets the count of measurement which should be
considered in the settling or @147[average algorithm]
(including the last measurement).

Selectable:  integer 2 .. 6   (settling)
                     2 .. 100 (average)

Description:
    Example for settling:
             A value of 3 means that the current measure-
             ment result is compared to the two preceding
             ones.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @519[Settling]


.521
TITLE: Analyzer Command: PH_SERES

Resolution sets the starting width of the resolution
curves.

Selectable:   Value given in DEG or RAD

Description:
    If a value is outside of the tolerance curve, the
    resolution curve sets the measurement value which must
    not be exceeded to violate the settling rule. Smaller
    values than the given resolution are accepted always.

    See manual, chapter 2.3.

Note: Menuitem appears only if @519[settling] is set to
         EXP or FLAT.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @519[Settling]


.522
TITLE: Analyzer Command: PH_SETOU

Timeout sets the maximum allowed time for @579[settling]
of the phase measurement.

Selectable:   time value given in seconds.

Description:
    If the phase values do not settle in the
    given time, the measurement is terminated and
    the result is marked as void.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @519[Settling]


.523
TITLE: Command: SN3_DAT1

Freq Result Ch1

.524
TITLE: Command: SN3_DAT2

Freq Result Ch2

.525
TITLE: Command: SN4_DAT

Phase Result

.526
TITLE: Command: MO_ACTIV

MONITOR switches the audio monitoring output (used for
acoustic control) of the analyzer on or off.

Selectable:  ON or OFF

Description:
    OFF:    Output disabled
    ON:     Output enabled, gain is chosen with
            @527[Attenuat.]

Note: The monitor signal is output prior to any filtering.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.527
TITLE: Command: MO_ATTEN

Attenuat. sets the gain of the monitor output.

Selectable:  gain value:  0 .. 70 dB

Description:
    Only if @526[MONITOR] is set to ON.







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.528
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_MEASM

FUNCTION selects the function of the @93[analyzer instrument]

Selectable:
    @20[RMS & S/N]:   True rms meter
    @21[RMS SELECT]:  Selective rms meter
    @22[PEAK & S/N]:  Peak level meter
    @23[Q-PK & S/N]:  Quasi peak meter
    @150[DC]:          Level meter
    @24[THD]:         Distortion meter (harmonics)
    @25[THD+N/SINAD]: Distortion meter (total)
    @26[MOD DIST]:    Intermodulation meter (d2+d3)
    @28[DFD]:         Differential tone meter (d2 or d3)
    @29[WOW & FL]:    Wow & flutter meter
    @30[FFT]:         Spectrum analyzer
    @31[FILTSIM]:     Filter simulation
    @33[POLARITY]:    Check polarity
    @614[WAVEFORM]:    Simple oscilloscope mode
    @801[PROTOCOL]:    Analysis of channel status bytes
    @77[COHERENCE]:   Coherence and transfer function
    @49[RUB & BUZZ]:  Loudspeaker measurements
    @148[PHAS TO REF]: Phase measurement (JITTER/PHAS only)
    @149[DIG INP AMP]: Level of digital input (COMMON/INP only)
    @155[3rd OCTAVE]:  Third Octave Analyzer
    @220[12th OCTAVE]: Twelfth Octave Analyzer

When measuring Jitter, only level measurements are allowed
@20[RMS], @21[RMS SELECT],  @30[FFT],  @614[WAVEFORM].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @79[Settling]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @801[Protocol analysis]
@36[Applications]   @37[Delay Measurement]


.529
TITLE: Command: FN_COUPL

Selection from: OFF, ON

Description:
  OFF: The DC voltage of DUT is included in the
       measurement result of function RMS & S/N and
       RMS SELECT and graphically represented in
       analyzer function WAVEFORM and FFT.
  ON:  The DC voltage of DUT will be suppressed

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.530
TITLE: ANALYZER command: FN_SNSEQ

S/N Sequ switches on and off the signal-to-noise measurement.

Selectable:   ON or OFF

Description:
    With S/N measurement enabled, a measurement is first
    carried out with the generator switched on and then
    with the generator switched off. The ratio of the two
    measurements is presented as the result.

Note: With S/N measurement enabled, a @584[PostFFT] is
    not available for @20[RMS].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.531
TITLE: Command: FN_MEAMD

Meas Mode sets the mode of selected measurement.

Selectable: for THD:      All even di, All odd di,
                          All di, SELECT di,
                          LEV even di, LEV odd di,
                          LEV all di, LEV SEL di
            for THD+N:    THD+N, SINAD, NOISE,
                          LEVEL THD+N, LEVEL NOISE
            for PEAK:     PK+, PK- PK to PK, PK abs
            for DFD:      d2, d3
            for WAVEFORM: STANDARD, COMPRESSED, UNDERSAMPLE

                              >>> Details see next page >>>

Description:
@24[THD]:    All even di:   all even harmonics (2,4,6,8),
                       referred to total signal
        LEV even di:   in voltage RMS.
        All odd di:    all odd harmonics (3,5,7,9),
                       referred to total signal
        LEV odd di:    in voltage RMS.
        All di:        all harmonics (2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9),
                       referred to total signal
        LEV all di:    in voltage RMS.
        SELECT di:     @534[individual selection], this setting
                       is overridden from the last setting.
                       referred to total signal
        LEV SEL di:    in voltage RMS.


@25[THD+N]:
    Meáergebnis(LEVEL THD+N) = Harmonische + Rauschen

    Meáergebnis(LEVEL NOISE) = Rauschen (ohne Harmonische)
    (f_min = 106Hz)


@25[THD+N]:

        LEVEL THD+N = Harmonics + Noise


        LEVEL NOISE = Noise (no harmonics)  (f_min = 106Hz)

                       Harmonics + Noise
        THD+N       = -------------------
                        Total signal

                        Total signal
        SINAD       = -------------------
                       Harmonics + Noise

                       Noise (no harmonics)
        NOISE       = --------------------- (f_min = 106Hz)
                        Total signal


@22[PEAK]:   PK+:      positive peaks
        PK-:      negative peaks
        PK to PK: pos - neg. peaks
        PK abs:   absolute maximum from pos. and neg.

@28[DFD]:    d2:       Measurement of intermodulation at
                  low frequencies, i.e. 10 kHz, 11 kHz:
                  --> 1kHz is measured.
        d3:       Measurement of intermodulation near
                  both test frequencies:
                  ie. 10 kHz, 11 kHz: --> 9 kHz and 12 kHz

@614[WAVEFORM]:
    STANDARD:   normally displays the samples, max.
                tracelength is 7488 pts, interpolation is
                available.
    COMPRESSED: The input signal is fed through a peak
                detector, max. tracelength is 7488 pts, 
                interpolation is not available.
                From a selectable @533[number of samples],
                the highest peak value is used as input
                signal to the WAVEFORM function.
                Thus the Display appears compressed on the
                x-axis.
                (ANLG25 and DIGITAL only)
    UNDERSAMPLE:
                 The input signal is 'undersampled' i.e. the
                 number of samples entered as @533[Comp Fact] will
                 be arithmetically averaged and then used as
                 input sample of waveform function. This
                 compressing of x axis enables the recording
                 of long times.
                 @607[Interpol] cannot be switched on.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.532
TITLE: GENERATOR command FN_MEACN

Line count defines the maximum number of third octave bands
that can be measured. The actual number of bands is set by
selecting @577[lower] and @578[upper frequency limits].

Selectable:  30, 32

Description:
    30: This (default) setting is required for applications
        that have been implemented in software version 2.02
        or earlier to keep compatibility.
        The 1st band measured is the 25 Hz line 
        (@577[Lower frequency] is limited to 22.6 Hz)
    32: Two additional bands below 25 Hz.
        New applications should use 32 lines to cover the full
        bandwidth down to 16 Hz.
        (@577[Lower frequency] is limited to 14.25 Hz)

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]   @155[3rd OCTAVE] measurement


.533
TITLE: Command: FN_CMPVL

Comp Fact sets the Compression rate.

Selectable: integer 2 .. 1024

Description:
    A selectable number of samples is fed through
    a peak detector. The peak values are used as
    input signal to the WAVEFORM function. Thus the
    Display appears compressed on the x-axis.

    The settling of an AGC may be observed with
    this function.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @614[WAVEFORM]   @531[Meas Mode]


.534
TITLE: Command: FN_NAMDI

Individual selection of harmonics to be measured.

Selectable:  d2, d3, d4 .... d9

Description:
    Harmonics, which are ticked off with û in the selection
    box are measured. This selection is only available
    if @531[Meas-Mode] is set to SELECT di or LEV SEL di.

Note: selected harmonics appear as thick columns in the
      display.
      This setting is loaded with the previous setting
      of @531[Meas-Mode].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @24[THD]


.535
TITLE: Command: FN_DYNMD

Selection of measurement optimazation.

Selectable:  FAST or PRECISION

Description:
    PRECISION:
        With analogue measurements (@24[THD], @25[THD+N], @26[MOD DIST]
        and @28[DFD]) the accuracy may be increased by
        repeating the measurement with an @570[analogue notch]
        filter in the signal path. The notch attenuates
        the fundamental component in the input signal.
    FAST:
        No repeated measurement is performed. The resol-
        ution of the instrument decreases a little bit,
        but measurement time speeds up.

Note: - the notch filter may be @570[selected manually] with
        the functions @20[RMS] und @30[FFT].
      - When UPL is running as O33 receiver, FAST should be
        selected.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.536
TITLE: Command: FN_REJEC

Rejection sets the type of the used notch filter with
the @25[THD+N] function.

Selectable: Narrow, Wide

Description:
    Narrow: The noise near the carrier is measured.
    Wide:   An additional notch filter (2 poles) is
            added around the carrier. Therefore noise
            and distortion components near the carrier
            are attenuated in the same way as in
            conventional analogue distortion meters.
    If the measurement value with the setting Narrow is
    much worse than the value using Wide, a modulation
    of the DUT may be the reason.
    (e.g. caused by jitter or a gain control)

Note: The upper frequency limit for the analogue notch
    filter is 22.5 kHz.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @25[THD+N]


.537
TITLE: Command: FN_WFRUL

Standard defines the standard according to which
@29[Wow&Flutter] is evaluated.

Selectable:  DIN/IEC, NAB, JIS, 2 Sigma 5s, 2 Sigma 10s

Description:
            Standard:   Ref.freq.  Evaluation
DIN/IEC:    DIN 45507   3150 Hz     Quasi peak
            IEC 386                 Rise time:    30.8 ms,
            CCIR 409-J              Drop off time: 606 ms

NAB:        NAB         3000 Hz     Averaging
                                    Time constant: 300 ms

JIS:        JIS         3000 Hz     RMS weighting
                                    Integration time 0.5 s

2Sigma 5s:  IEC 386/1988            Integration time: 5 s
2Sigma 10s:                         Integration time: 10 s
    A threshold v for the wow and flutter value is
    searched for at which 5%% of the measured values are
    greater in magnitude than the threshold v. The
    measurement result will not be affected by occasional
    outliers.

Notes: wow + flutter should be measured in one-channel
    configuration only.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @29[Wow & flutter]


.538
TITLE: Command: FN_WFWGT

Weight sets the weighting filter for the demodulated signal
of @29[W&F].

Selectable:    ON or OFF

Description:
    ON:     Weight with bandpass 4 Hz (given in IEC 386)
    OFF:    Weight with highpass 0.5 Hz

see: @537[Standard]

Note: Wow+flutter should only be measured on one channel.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @29[Wow & Flutter]


.539
TITLE: ANALYZER command: FN_MEATM

Meas Time sets the integration time and thus also
the measurement time of @20[RMS], @21[RMS SELECT], @25[THD+N/SINAD],
@150[DC], @155[3rd OCTAVE] and @220[12th OCTAVE].

Selectable:  RMS(SELECT):    AUTO FAST, AUTO, VALUE:,
                             GEN TRACK, TRIGGERED
             DC:             FIX 200ms, VALUE:
             THD+N/SINAD:    SUPERFAST, FAST, SLOW
             3rd/12th OCTAVE:VALUE:

Description:
    VALUE:     fixed measurement time: @540[Time input]

    for @150[DC] measurement:
    FIX 200ms: fixed measurement time of 200 ms

    for @20[RMS] and @21[RMS SELECT] measurement:
    AUTO FAST: The measurement interval is matched to the
    AUTO:      input signal as best as possible. This is
               however only possible if the analyzer
               has an input signal at least 0.1%% of its
               dynamic range (after internal filters, if
               any).
               If the input signal is less than this value,
               the measurement will be made at the set
               @429[Min Freq].
               With AUTO the rms-precision is 0.1%% and with
               AUTO FAST the precision is 1%% but measure-
               ment is normally 10 times faster.
    GEN TRACK: measurement time is 100 samples or
               1/(generator frequency), whatever is larger.
               The generator justifies its output
               frequency so that an integer count
               of measurement samples is acheived.
               Note: if internal generator provides a 
               - @45[MODDIST]-signal, GEN TRACK referes to 
                 @301[LOWER FREQ]
               - @50[ARBITRARY]-signal, GEN TRACK referes to
                 the length of the loaded @279[file].
    TRIGGERED: measurement starts after crossing the
               @605[Trig Level] and last the given
               @540[integration time].

    Note:  With the analyzer instrument ANLG 110kHz the
           calculation of the input samples is done
           offline; therefore the sum of measurement time
           and @634[filter settling time] is limited by
           the available memory.

    For @25[THD+N] measurement:
    Adjustment of measurement speed to required accuracy.
    Higher speed is achieved by reducing FFT size.

    SUPERFAST: 0.5 k FFT-Size
    FAST:      2   k FFT-Size
    SLOW:      8   k FFT-Size

    Note:  If @584[Post FFT] is turned on @585[FFT Size] can
           individually be selected, i.e. the (pre-)
           selection of measurement speed will be ignored.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.540
TITLE: Command: FN_MTMVL

Setting of integration time.

Selectable:   time value; limits depend on 
              selected @528[analyzer function]:
              @155[3rd OCTAVE]: lower limit depends
                 on selected @441[Sampling rate].
              @220[12th OCTAVE]: lower limit depends
                 on selected @577[lower frequency limits].

Description:
    integration times should be as long as possible and a 
    multiple of the input signal frequency (@20[RMS-Messung]) 
    or the frequency of a dominant AC component (@150[DC]).
    only @220[12th OCTAVE analysis]: the integration time
       set determines the number of FFT-averages 
       to be performed for each measuremement.
       The time of each measuremement is rounded to a
       multiple of its lower limit.

    see @539[Meas Time]!

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.541
TITLE: ANALYZER command: FN_ITVTM

Intv Time:   Setting the read-out rate (@22[PEAK] and @23[QUASI PEAK]).

Max Hold :   Setting the hold function for the maximum
             result of each frequency band (@155[3rd OCTAVE-]
             or @220[12th OCTAVE-] analysis).
             Reset by pressing the START key.
             Max-hold values can be displayed either
             graphically as horizontal markers in the
             spectrum or numerically in a spectrum list.
             To present numerical results, switch to
             Scan #2 (PgUp or PgDn key).

Selectable:  3rd OCTAVE:  OFF, FOREVER, SLOW/FAST DECAY,
             12th OCTAVE: OFF, ON (same as FOREVER)
             (QUASI)PEAK: FIX 50ms, FIX 200ms, FIX 1000ms
                          FIX 3 SEC, VALUE

Description of @22[PEAK] measurement:
    FIX 50ms:  Measurement speed approx. 50ms
    FIX 200ms: Measurement speed approx. 200ms
    FIX 1000ms:Measurement speed approx. 1s
    VALUE:     Measurement speed can be set with
               @542[following input].

Description of @23[QUASI-PEAK] measurement:
    FIX 3 SEC: Measurement speed approx. 3s,
    VALUE:     Measurement speed can be set with
               @542[following input].

    Note: Rise time of QUASI-PEAK: approx. 144 ms,
          thus the settings FIX 50ms ... 1000ms
          are not available
          In single measurement and SWEEP it is recommended
          to use FIX 3 SEC since to avoid unsettled result.

Description of Max Hold (@155[3rd] or @220[12th] OCTAVE analysis):
    OFF:        Max-hold function switched off;
                only the bars are displayed.
    FOREVER/ON: the markers remain on the maximum values;
                reset only by starting the measurement
                (START key).
    SLOW DECAY: (only @155[3rd OCTAVE] analysis);
                the markers remain on the maximum values
                for the @542[Hold time] to be set in the
                following line and then decay
                exponentially (time constant 0.5 s).
    FAST DECAY: (only @155[3rd OCTAVE] analysis);
                the markers remain on the maximum values
                for the @542[Hold time] to be set in the
                following line and then go back to the
                current measurement value for the third.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.542
TITLE: Command: FN_ITMVL

Setting of the value for the
    - @541[measurement speed] (@22[PEAK] and @23[QUASI PEAK] measurement)
    - @541[Hold Time] (@155[3rd OCTAVE] measurement).

Selection from:   time in sec.










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.543
TITLE: Command: FN1UNIT

Unit Ch1:  Setting of the display unit.

Selectable:   according to selected @425[Analyzer]
              @82[digital] or @81[analog] units.
              If @426[Jitter/Phas] is selected:
              @85[interface units].
              @77[Coherence measurement] uses an individual
              unit çý.

Description:  The given unit is used for the display in the
              @3[measurement window].
              The graphic display unit is preset with this
              unit.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.544
TITLE: Command: FN2UNIT



see @543[Unit Ch1]!


.545
TITLE: Command: FN_GRAPH

internal, always ON
.546
TITLE: Command: FN_REFMD

Reference sets the reference value for the relative meter
of @528[measurement function].

Selection from:  MEAS CH1, MEAS CH2, GEN TRACK,
                 STORE CH1, STORE CH2, STORE, VALUE:

Description:
    MEAS CH1, MEAS CH2: The selected channel is used
            (online) as reference.
    GEN TRACK: The output level of the @92[generator] is used
            (online) as reference.
    STORE CH1, STORE CH2, STORE:  The current measurement
            value is stored and used as reference value.
    VALUE:  The value set with @547[following input]
            is used as reference value.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL] @93[ANALYZER panel] @81[analogue units] @82[digital units]
.!@1005[Conv Fact]


.547
TITLE: Command: FN_REFVL

Setting of the reference value for relative measurements.

Selectable:  Level value

Description:
    see @546[Reference].







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @21[RMS selective]     @93[Analyzer]


.548
TITLE: Command: FN_FUNDA

Fundamental specifies the way in which the analyzer is to
determine the fundamental frequency of the input signal
for the @24[THD measurement] and the @25[THD+N measurement].

Selectable:   AUTO, VALUE

Description:
    AUTO:   The fundamental is determined automatically,
            however the applied signal has to be at least
            0.1%% (for @24[THD]) and 1%% (for @25[THD+N]) of the
            dynamic range and the distortion better
            than -30dB.
    VALUE:  The fundamental frequency is specified
            with the following @549[Setting].

Notes: lower frequency limit:
            @24[THD]:   @441[Sampling rate] /8190;
                i.e. with ANLG22: approx. 6 Hz.
            @25[THD+N]: @441[Sampling rate] / 2400;
                i.e. with ANLG22: approx. 20 Hz.
       needed accuracy for THD-VALUE: (i.e. for ANLG22)
            better 100 ppm below 40 Hz,
            better 1000 ppm below 100 Hz,
            better 1%% all other ranges.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.549
TITLE: Command: FN_FNDVL

Setting of the fundamental frequency for the @24[THD]
measurement.

Selectable:   any frequency value in the given range

Description:
     see @548[Fundamentl].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.550
TITLE: Command: FN_BANDW

Bandwidth defines the bandwidth of the bandpass filter.

Selectable: BP: 1%%, 3%%, 1/3 OCT, 1/12 OCT, FIX, FAST
            BS: 1%%, 3%%, 1/3 OCT, 1/12 OCT, FIX, FAST

Description:
  (BP = Band Pass, BS = Band Stop)
    1%%:      The passband of the filter has a bandwidth
             (at 0.1dB) of 1%% of the @553[Center frequency]
    3%%:      The passband of the filter has a bandwidth
             (at 0.1dB) of 3%% of center frequency
    1/3 OCT: The passband of the filter has a bandwidth (at
             3dB) of one third of an octave (23%%).
    1/12 OCT:The passband of the filter has a bandwidth (at
             0.1dB) of 1/12 of an octave (6%%).
    FIX:     The passband of the filter is given as fixed
             value in Hz with the @551[following setting].
    FAST:    Band filter with only 40 dB attenuation, third
             octave bandwidth and particularly short filter
             delay

Notes:
  - The filter has a ripple of 0.1dB in the passband and
    a stopband attenuation of at least 100dB (for ANLG 22kHz
    and DIGITAL) resp. 74dB (for ANLG 110 kHz).
  - At low @553[Center frequencies] and narrow
    pass bandwidth, transient and stability problems may
    occur (see also help notes on
    @21[RMS selective measurement]).
  - The bandpass filter has a minimum width of 9.9Hz.
  - The width is positioned geometric symmetrically about
    the @553[center frequency].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @21[RMS selective]    @32[Filter design]


.551
TITLE: Command: FN_BWFVL

Value entry for FIX @550[bandwidth] of the bandpass filter.

Selectable:  frequency as given in the on-line help

Description:
    The given width is the 0.1dB width, not the 3dB width.
    The width is positioned arithmetric symmetrically about
    the @553[center frequency].





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @21[RMS selective]    @32[Filter design]


.552
TITLE: Analyzer command: FN_SWPMD

SWEEP CTRL specifies the sweep mode.

Selectable: OFF, AUTO SWEEP, AUTO LIST,
                 MANU SWEEP, MANU LIST, GEN MLTSINE

Description:
    OFF:        No SWEEP
    AUTO SWEEP: Switching to the next sweep point
                (calculated by UPL automatically)
                depending on @302[Next step].
    AUTO LIST:  Switching to the next sweep entry in the
                list depending on @302[Next step].
    MANU SWEEP: Same as AUTO SWEEP, but stepping with key
                @18[Single] or roll key (when in GRAPH).
    MANU LIST:  Same as AUTO LIST, but stepping with key
                @18[Single] or roll key.
  GEN MLTSINE:  The frequencies of @41[Multisine]
                are used as sweep points.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.553
TITLE: Analyzer command: FN_FRQMD

FREQ MODE command defines the way in which the center
frequency of the band filter or the search frequency
of the @93[Analyzer] is to be set.

Selectable:  @21[RMS Sel.]: FIX, GEN TRACK, FREQ CH1, FREQ CH2
             @27[DIM]:      FIX, GEN TRACK
Description:
    FIX:        The frequency is set with
                @554[Following input].
    GEN TRACK:  The generator frequency is used as
                set frequency.
    FREQ CH1:   The (last) result of the frequency
                measurement in channel 1 is used.
    FREQ CH2:   The (last) result of the frequency
                measurement in channel 2 is used.

Notes on RMS SELECT:
  - Transient and stability problems may occur at
    low values of the center frequency and at
    narrow @550[passband width]. (See also help notes
    on @21[RMS selective measurement] ).


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @21[RMS select]     @93[Analyzer]


.554
TITLE: Command: FN_FMDVL

Setting of mean frequency of the bandpass for
@21[selective RMS measurements].

Selection from:  frequency setting in Hz.

Description:
    see @553[FREQ MODE] and @550[Bandwidth].
    Values smaller than 10Hz or @441[sample rate] / 5000
    are not allowed.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @21[RMS selective]     @93[Analyzer]


.555
TITLE: Command: FN_SQAVL

Square/Sin determines the frequency pair to be measured
for @27[DIM] (Dynamic Intermodulation).

Selectable:  2.96/14kHz or 3.15/15kHz

Description:
    The first value is the fundamental of the squarewave,
    the second sets the sine. The analyzer scans 3%% around
    the given frequencies for signals.
    From these signal frequencies the search ranges
    for intermodulation products are calculated.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.556
TITLE: Command: FN_FNDFC

Description:
  Specifies the factor that the generator's frequency is
  multiplied with to obtain the band-pass / -stop
  @553[center frequency] of @21[RMS SELECT] measurement
  or the high-pass frequency of @49[RUB & BUZZ] measurement.
  Setting this factor to an integer value greater then 1
  measures a single harmonic of the generator's frequency
  (RMS SELECT) or the RUB & BUZZ value starting with
  the specified harmonic, respectively
  To select the fundamental of RMS SELECT measurement
  the factor has to be set to 1.
  The factor does not affect the @571[Notch Freq]. If GEN TRACK
  has been selected @570[Notch] is set to the generator's
  frequency without considering 'Factor' in order to obtain
  a higher measurement dynamic by suppressing the
  fundamental in the analog signal.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.557
TITLE: Command: FN_SW_SY

Selection from: NORMAL, FAST, BLOCK

Description:
  NORMAL:
    normal sweep stepping without speed optimization;
    available for all sweeps.
  FAST:
    enhanced sweep speed for measured functions
    @21[RMS SELECT] and @49[RUB & BUZZ].
    Measurement results are not displayed.
  BLOCK:
    highest sweep speed for measured functions
    @20[RMS S/N], @21[RMS SELECT] and @49[RUB & BUZZ].
    Measurement results are not displayed;
    sweep curves are painted at the end of sweep.

  FAST and BLOCK synchronization are only available in
  analyzers ANLG 22 kHz and DIG 48 kHz.
  Sweep Mode does not appear in @1014[high rate mode] of UPL-B29.
  Preconditions of generator settings:
    @262[function]      SINE
    @264[Low Dist]      OFF
    @301[SWEEP CTRL]    AUTO ...
    @310[X Axis]        FREQ
    @311[Z Axis]        OFF

    The 1. sweep always runs with normal speed while
    generator parameters are learnt and stored to be
    available for the following passes. Thus, the
    setting times of these passes are much shorter.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @228[SWEEPs]


.558
TITLE: Command: FN_SWPSC

Spacing defines how @21[RMS Select] SWEEP is to be scaled.

Selectable:  LIN POINTS, LIN STEPS, LOG POINTS, LOG STEPS

Description:
    LIN POINTS: linear scaling, @561[Points] different
                frequencies are generated
    LIN STEPS:  linear scaling, the difference between
                the steps is a constant @562[Frequency].
    LOG POINTS: logarithmic scaling, @561[Points]
                different frequencies are generated.
    LOG STEPS:  logarithmic scaling, the difference
                between the steps is a constant @562[Ratio].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.559
TITLE: Command: FN_SWPST

Start sets the first value of a @21[RMS selective] SWEEP.

Selection from:  frequency value

Description:
    Pressing the @16[START] key starts the sweep with
    the first frequency value. The start value may be
    less or greater than the @322[Stop] value.


!-> Start must not be smaller than 10Hz or @441[sample rate] /
    5000.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.560
TITLE: Command: FN_SWPSP

Stop sets the last frequency of the @21[RMS selective] SWEEP.

Selectable: frequency value

Description:
    The stop frequency may be longer or shorter than the
    @420[start frequency]. Stop is in every case the setting
    at the end of the sweep.

!-> Stop must not be smaller than 10Hz or @441[sample rate] /
    5000.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.561
TITLE: Command: FN_SWPPN

Points sets the count of points of the @21[RMS selective]
sweep.

Selection from:  integer value: 2 .. 1024

Description:
    The sweep runs from @559[start] to @560[stop] with the
    given count of points (including both end points).






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.562
TITLE: Command: FN_SWPSE

Step sets the change in sweep from one point to the next.

Selectable:  for LIN STEPS: frequency value
             for LOG STEPS: ratio

Description:
    The sweep starts at the given @559[start frequency]
    and runs with the set steps up or down to the
    @560[stop frequency]. If the stop frequency is not
    fully reached, it is set separately as the
    last point of sweep.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[Analyzer panel]


.563
TITLE: Command: FN_LSTFL

SWEEP file for RMS-selective-SWEEP

Selection from:   @9[filename]

Description:
    In the file the center frequencies of the selective
    filter for each sweep step is given.

    If there are less entries in the file than points
    defined for the current sweep, the last entry is used
    for all remaining sweep steps.

    default file extension: .spf


Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.spf

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.! @564-@568 FN_LSTF0 - FN_LSTF4
.564
TITLE: About speaker

Turning on/off:
    Pressing the key @15[LOCAL] (or Ctrl+F12) switches
    the speaker on or off.
    To protect the ear from too high volume set by mistake
    the speaker is always turned off automatically in case
    of changing
    - measurement function
    - analyzer instrument
    - setup or
    - speaker source

Setting the volume:
    Pressing the key '+/-' (or '#') calls a small menu,
    which allows the setting of the speaker volume with
    the knob or with the cursor keys.
    Alternatively the volume may be set with the command
    @612[Speaker Volume] in the @93[analyzer] panel.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @610[Source]   @611[Pregain]


.565
TITLE: Frequency limit of UPL

Frequency limit for analyzers:

ANLG 22kHz :   10Hz ... 21,9kHz
ANLG 110kHz:   20Hz ... 110kHz
DIGITAL    :   10Hz ... Sampling rate*117/256


The Sample Frq may be selected as:
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz or @442[VALUE].
VALUE allows any external @112[sampling rate] to be set.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.569
TITLE: Analyzer Command FN_CH_DL

Interchannel delay compensation of the DUT;
Delay compensation is of relevance to phase or
coherence measurements.

Select from: Value indicated in s

Description:
  Available for 2-channel FFT (without zoom) or Coherence
  measurment in analyzer ANLG 25 kHz or DIGITAL.
  Input of time by which channel 1 is to be delayed with
  respect to channel 2. If channel 2 has a shorter delay
  than channel 1, this can be compensated for by entering
  a negative value.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @77[Coherence]   @30[FFT]


.570
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_NOTCH

Anlg Notch turns the analogue prefilter (in front of the
converters) on or off.

Selectable:   OFF, 0 dB, 12 dB or 30 dB

Description:
    The prefilter may only be set for analogue measurements
    @23[QUASI PEAK], @30[FFT], @20[RMS].
    The prefilter attenuates the set frequency by about
    30dB and amplifies the residual signal about the given
    gain. The display of the FFT is shown with attenuated
    frequency and unchanged other signals.

    The (rejection-) frequency is set with @571[Notch Freq].

Notes:
  - With @24[THD], @25[THD+N], @26[MOD DIST] and @28[DFD] this notch
    is selected automatically and may be turned off
    with @535[Dyn Mode].
  - Quantization noise measurement: see notes on @23[QUASI PEAK]
  - The upper frequency limit is 22.5 kHz.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.571
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_NOFRQ

Notch Freq selects how the frequency of the (analogue)
@570[notch filter] is fixed.

Selectable:  GENTRK or VALUE:

Description:
    GENTRK: The center frequency is set to the output
            frequency of the generator.
            (only for sinusoidal signals)
    VALUE:  The center frequency is set with the following
            @572[setting].

Note: The upper frequency limit for the analogue notch
    filter is 22.5 kHz.

Get more Help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.572
TITLE: Command: FN_NOFVL

Setting of rejection frequency of the @570[analogue prefilter].

Selectable:  frequency value from 10 Hz to 100 kHz

Description:
    The prefilter attenuates the given frequency and
    raises the residual signal by about 30dB.
    The upper frequency limit for the analogue notch
    filter is 22.5 kHz.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.573
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FILT1

Filter 1 - 3 selects the used weighting filter

Selectable: one of 9 in @94[FILTER panel] user-defined
            filters (given with @635[shortnames]) or
            one of predefined filters:
            A Weighting, C MESSAGE,  CCITT,     CCIR wtg,
            CCIR unwtd,  DEEM 50/15, DEEMPH 50, DEEMPH 75,
            DEEMPH J.17, RUMBLE wtd, RUMBLE unw,DC NOISE HP
            CCIRARM,     DIN 315,    JITTER wtd.

Description:
    Depending on the selected measurement up to 3 filters
    are selectable:
    @20[RMS]:          up to 3 filters
    @21[RMSSEL]:       one filter
    @22[PEAK]:         up to 3 filters (*)
    @23[QUASI-PEAK]:   up to 3 filters (*)
    @25[THD+N/SINAD]:  one filter
    @614[WAVEFORM]:     one filter (*)
    @155[3rd-OCTAVE]:   one filter (*)
    @49[RUB & BUZZ]:   up to 2 filters
    @30[FFT]:          up to 3 filters (*)
(*) no filter in @1014[high rate mode] (UPL-B29) or ANLG 110.

    The time and frequency response of the filters may be
    simulated by selecting the analyzer function @31[FILTSIM].

    It is possible to select the same filter multiple to
    obtain higher fall-offs and attenuations.

Notes: If any other special filter is required, please
    contact Rohde & Schwarz!
    CCIRARM is sometimes known as CCIR_2kHz.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]  @20[RMS & S/N]  @32[Filter design]


.574
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FILT2

            See help about @573 [Filter 1] !


.575
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FILT3

            See help about @573 [Filter 1] !


.576
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FILT4

UPD only.


.577
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_BLLOW

FrqLim Low sets the lower limit of measurement.

Selectable:  Frequency value within the specified limits.

Description:
    For the @25[THD+N] measurement the noise and distortion
       products are weighted from FrqLim low up to
       @578[FrqLim Upp].
       FrqLim Upp must be greater than FrqLim Low.
       The graphic displays the complete measurement
       range independent of the limits specified here for
       the evaluation.

    For the @155[3rd OCTAVE] and @220[12th OCTAVE] analysis the 
       representation and calculation of the (third) 
       bands start with the band containing the lower 
       limit frequency. Any signals below the lowest band
       as well as signals behind the highest band (@578[FrqLim Upp])
       will neither be included in the calculation of the
       total RMS value nor be displayed in graphic.
       The higher the lower limit frequency, the faster
       the signal will settle and the shorter the time
       for first measurement.
       only @220[12th OCTAVE analysis]: the lower the lower 
          limit frequency the higher the zoom factor of 
          the FFT and the longer the minimal @540[Meas Time].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @25[THD+N measurement]   @155[3rd]/@220[12th] OCTAVE measurement


.578
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_BLUPP

FrqLim Upp sets the upper limit of measurement.

Selectable:  Frequency value within the specified limits.

Description:
    For the @25[THD+N measurement] the noise and distortion
       products are weighted from @577[FrqLim Low] up to
       this frequency.
       FrqLim Upp must be greater than FrqLim Low.
       The graphic displays the complete measurement range
       independent of the limits specified here for
       the evaluation.
       The upper limit may be extended up to 125kHz (Only
       for analyzer instrument ANLG 110kHz). This is the
       3dB-point of the analyzer.

    For the @155[3rd OCTAVE] and @220[12th OCTAVE] analysis the 
       representation and calculation of the (third) 
       bands ends with the band containing the upper 
       limit frequency. Any signal behind the highest 
       band will not be included in the calculation of 
       the total RMS value.
       Frequency limit upper does not affect the
       measurement time.
       only @220[12th OCTAVE analysis]: a high 'Frequency 
          limit upper' in conjunction with a low
          'Frequency limit lower' may cause an 
          additional internal measurement to be 
          performed and so might slightly increase 
          total time of measurement 

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @25[THD+N measurement]   @155[3rd]/@220[12th] OCTAVE measurement


.579
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FN_SETTL

Settling implements a filter for the @528[function] results.

Selectable:  OFF, EXPONENTIAL, FLAT, AVERAGE

Description:
    OFF:         no settling
    EXPONENTIAL: Exponential curve for tolerance and
                 resolution values.
    FLAT:        horizontal curve for tolerance and
                 resolution values.
    AVERAGE:     @147[Arithmetic averaging] of all measurement
                 results.

Notes:
  - Settling is not available for @30[FFT], @33[POLARITY]
    and @614[WAVEFORM].
  - @583[Timeout] sets the max. time allowed for settling.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @79[Settling]   @93[ANALYZER panel]


.580
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FN_SESMP

Samples sets the count of measurement which should be
considered in the settling or @147[average algorithm]
(including the last measurement).

Selectable:  integer 2 .. 6   (settling)
                     2 .. 100 (average)

Description:
    Example for settling:
             A value of 3 means that the current measure-
             ment result is compared to the two preceding
             ones.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @579[Function Settling]


.581
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FN_SETOL

Tolerance sets the starting width of @579[settling].

Selectable: percent or dB value.

Description:
    Tolerance gives the max. allowable deviation of the
    current measurement value related to the previous one.
    Only results with a smaller deviation as tolerance
    are marked as valid. The allowed deviation related
    to older results (2,3,4,5) depends on the setting
    of EXPONENTIAL | FLAT.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @579[Settling]


.582
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FN_SERES

Resolution sets the starting width of the resolution
curves.

Selectable: Value given in the @99[Unit] of the current
function.

Description:
    If a value is outside of the tolerance curve, the
    resolution curve sets the measurement value which must
    not be exceeded to violate the settling rule. Smaller
    values than the given resolution are accepted always.

    See manual, chapter 2.3.

Note: Menuitem appears only if @579[settling] is set to
         EXP or FLAT.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @579[Settling]


.583
TITLE: Analyzer Command: FN_SETOU

Timeout sets the maximum allowed time for @579[settling].

Selectable:   time value given in seconds.

Description:
    If the measurement values do not settle in the
    given time, the measurement is terminated and
    the result is marked as void.
    (If the @1[UPL] runs multiplexed, the analyzer is
    switched to the other channel, resp. the sweep
    is continued.)


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER panel]   @579[Settling]


.584
TITLE: ANALYZER command: FN_PSTFT

PostFFT:     Performs a @30[FFT] after completion of the
             @20[RMS], @29[W+F], @25[THD+N] measurement.

Selectable:  ON or OFF

Description: After settling of the (selected) @573[filters]
             and sampling the data needed for the FFT, the
             RMS measurement is stopped and an FFT is per-
             formed. This results in a frequency display
             of the input signal and the filters.

Notes: PostFFT with @25[THD+N]:
            The following settings of the FFT are fixed:
            @585[FFT size]:  8192
            @586[Window]:    RIFE VINC 3

           If the measurement is analogue and the THD+N
           value is better than 70 dB, the spectrum is
           displayed after (!) the analogue prefilter in
           the case of postFFT. In this case, the ampli-
           tude of the @548[fundamental] is approx.
           30dB below the reference, which is the rms of
           the signal.

    PostFFT with @20[RMS]:
           If @530[S/N measurement] is switched on, a postFFT is
           not available.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]    @94[FILTER panel]


.585
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTSIZ

FFT Size sets the number of processed lines of @30[FFT]

Selectable:  256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192

Description: select a larger FFT size to get more
             @596[Resolution]. @597[Meas Time] increases with
             larger size.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.586
TITLE: ANALYZER command: FN_FTWIN

WINDOW selects a window function for the @30[FFT]
       and @77[COHERENCE]

Selectable:  HANN,        RECTANGULAR,  BLACKMAN-H,
             RIFE-VINC 1, RIFE-VINC 2,  RIFE-VINC 3,
             HAMMING,     FLAT_TOP,     KAISER

Description: Windows are used to compensate intrinsic
      spectral leakage of the FFT. The windowing operation
      trades spectral frequency resolution for a reduction
      in leakage.

Application of Windows:
HANN: Useful for general analysis, relatively sharp and
      good leakage suppression.    (P)
RECTANGULAR (or BOXCAR): No windowing is performed. useful
      for signals with frequency, which are a multiple of
      @596[FFT resolution].
      See also: @48[RANDOM], @272[Domain frequency] and
      @38[application FFT noise]
BLACKMAN-HARRIS: Leakage suppression down to -80dB
RIFE VINC 1, 2, 3: Very good leakage suppression. Different
      trade-offs between frequency resolution and
      suppression are possible.    (P)
HAMMING: No significant performance advantages
FLAT-TOP: Poor frequency resolution but accurate estimation
      of sine amplitudes in the displayed spectrum.
KAISER: Trade-off between frequency resolution and leakage
      suppression selectable through choice of @587 [á].

Note: (P): suitable for frequency and phase measurement.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]  @30[FFT]    @77[COHERENCE]


.587
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTWVL

á-Factor: Parameter of @586[Window] = KAISER

Selectable:  from 1.5 - 20

Description:
      á = 8 results in good frequency resolution, but
      leakage suppression is only -90dB.
      á = 16 results in relatively poor frequency
      resolution, but leakage suppression is good.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]   @30 [FFT]


.588
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTAVM

Avg Mode sets the type of averaging used in the @30[FFT]

Selectable:  EXPONENTIAL or NORMAL

Description: Average smoothes the FFT display.
    NORMAL: The @589[given count] of FFTs is performed,
            the results added and divided through the
            given count.
    EXPONENTIAL: Averaging is done continuously.
            Example:     average = 3
             view    = 0.33 * measurement[i] +
                       0.67 * (old_averages)

Notes: - Average is not executed if the Display @807[Mode] is
         set to MAX HOLD.
       - After a restart of the measurement (i.e. caused
         by a sweep, a @1105[CALIBRATE] or cursor movements)
         the average is cancelled and restarted.
       - FFT-rescales are suppressed during an average
         run and executed after termination of the averages
       - @30[FFT] and SWEEP:
         Averaging is performed at each SWEEP step.
         NORMAL:      One picture per sweep step.
         EXPONENTIAL: Count pictures per sweep step are
                      displayed, showing the settling
                      of the average. After averaging,
                      a selected @807[waterfall] is performed.
                      this is done at each sweep step
                      separately and cleared on stepping.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.589
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTAVR

Avg Count:   count of average runs of @30[FFT]
             or @77[COHERENCE]

Selectable:  1 .. 256 (FFT)
             2 .. 2048 (COHERENCE)

Description: Average smoothes the resulting display.

Note: Avg Count must be set to 1 if Display @807[Mode]
      MAX HOLD is be selected.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]   @588[Average Mode]


.590
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTZOM

Zooming:     preprocessor of @30[FFT]

Selectable:  OFF or ON(2..128)

Description: OFF: a standard FFT is performed
             ON(2..128):
                  a preprocessor is used to enhance the
                  resolution of the FFT. Use @591[CENTER] and
                  @592[SPAN] to control the preprocessor.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.591
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTCEN

Center fixes center frequency of calculated spectrum of
@30 [FFT].

Selectable:  any value in the measurement range

Description: frequency zooming is performed about the
             Center frequency. This value influences @594[Start]
             and @595[Stop].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.592
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTSPN

Span defines width of calculated spectrum of @30[FFT]

Selectable:  one of predefined spans

Description: Span determines the decimator steps to use.
             See also @593 [Zoom Fact].







Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.593
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTZFC

Zoom Fact fixes count of zoom-steps of @30 [FFT]

Selectable:  VIEW ONLY!
             (if @590 [Zooming] is ON).

Description: shows count of decimation steps in FFT,
             depends on @592 [SPAN].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.594
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTST

Start shows the beginning of calculated spectrum of @30[FFT]

Selectable:  VIEW ONLY!

Description: Start depends on @441[Samplerate], @591[CENTER]
             @592 [SPAN] (if @590 [Zooming] is ON).
             if zooming is OFF, start is 0.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.595
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTSP

Stop shows the end of calculated spectrum of @30[FFT]

Selectable:  VIEW ONLY!

Description: Stop depends on @441[Samplerate], @591 [CENTER]
             and @592 [SPAN].
             Stop is the first frequency line not in
             spectrum.
             If @590[Zooming] is set OFF, stop is 117/256
             of the @441[sample rate].



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.596
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTRES

Resolution shows the frequency resolution time of @30[FFT]

Selectable:  VIEW ONLY!

Description: shows the spacing of lines in the FFT.
             Resolution is better with increasing @585[SIZE]
             of the FFT and with smaller @592[SPAN]
             (if ZOOM is ON).

                          @441[Sample Rate]
            Resolution = ----------------------
                          @585[Size] * Zoom Factor

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.597
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_FTMTM

Meas-Time shows the acquisition time of @30 [FFT]

Selectable:  VIEW ONLY!

Description:
    shows the time needed for data acquisition in the FFT.
    Deep zooming (small @592[SPAN]) and large @585[FFT Size])
    results in long measurement times, but good
    @596[resolution].

Note: - This is not the time interval of measurements.
      - With 'fast' instruments the signal is stored to
        memory first an then evaluated. This decreases
        display update rate.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[ANALYZER panel]


.598
TITLE: ANALYZER command IP_EQ

Equalizer enables the biasing of the FFT spectrum
for display and calculation of measured values of 
RMS- or THD+N-measurement.

Selection from:  ON or OFF

Description:
    ON:    Each FFT-Bin is multiplied by its 
           corresponding (interpolated) bias 
           factor of the @599[equalization file].
           default file extension: *.VEQ
    OFF:   no equalization of the FFT spectrum

The equalization file can be generated after a sweep 
with the command @956[STORE:EQUALIZATION] in the @95[FILE panel].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[analyzer panel]


.599
TITLE: ANALYZER command IP_EQ_FL

Equal.File: Name of the file which contains the
preset (desired) amplitude response (for bias).

Selectable:  @8[DOS]-@9[Filename]

Description:
    The file contains amplitude correction values
    at various frequencies. They are used to bias
    the FFT spectrum

    Default file extension: .VEQ

The equalization file can be generated after a sweep 
with the command @956[STORE:EQUALIZATION] in the @95[FILE panel].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @93[Analysator panel]


.! @600[IP_EQFL0] - @604[IP_EQFL4] free
.605
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_OSZTL

Trig Level sets the trigger voltage.

Selection from:  Level setting

Description:
    The trigger level has a fixed value independent of
    the measurement range (which may be FIX or set by
    @34[AUTO RANGE].
    The trigger point is always at the beginning of the
    memory individually for each trace. Traces are NOT
    time correlated.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @614[WAVEFORM]   @606[Trig Slope]


.606
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_OSZTS

Trig Slope sets the slope of the trigger.

Selection from: RISING or FALLING

Description:
    RISING:  Triggering takes place on passing the trigger
             level from bottom to top.

    FALLING: Triggering takes place on passing the trigger
             level from top to bottom.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @614[WAVEFORM]   @606[Trig Level]


.607
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_OSZIP

Interpol selects the interpolation steps for displaying
the recorded trace.

Selection from: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32

Description:
    The interpol setting allows a smoothed display of
    the input signal if the signal is recorded with a
    small number of samples per period.
    This can only be done at the expense of the maximum
    permissible @548[Trace length].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @614[WAVEFORM]


.608
TITLE: ANALYZER command FN_OSZLE

Trace Len sets the length of the collected signal.

Selection from:  Time entry

Description:
    Trace Len is determined by @381[Sampling rate] and
    @544[Interpol].
    The following applies (for @531[STANDARD] setting):

                                7487
    max. Trace Len = -----------------------------
                        Sampling rate * Interpol

    The following applies (for @531[COMPRESSED] setting):

                           65535
    max. Trace Len = -----------------  * @533[Comp Fact]
                        Sampling rate

Example: Sampling rate = 48 kHz, Interpol = 1:
          Trace Len  = 156 ms

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @614[WAVEFORM]


.609
TITLE: Analyzer Command FN_OSZTC

Trig Src determines the trigger channel.

Select from: 1, 2 or GEN BURST

Description:
    1,2:  In the case of two-channel measurements, the time
          is displayed with a time reference between the
          channels.
          The other channel is indicated as "COUPLED".
    GEN BURST:
          If the generator runs a burst signal, the
          analyzer may be triggered synchronous to the
          burst.
          @606[Slope] = rising:  trigger point at the begin of
                           the "high" level.
          Slope = falling: trigger point at the end of
                          the "high" level.
          With this setting, the delay of a DUT can be
          measured.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @614[WAVEFORM]   @37[Delay Measurement]


.610
TITLE: Command: FN_SPEAK

SPEAKER sets the source of @564[speaker output].

Selectable:  OFF, FUNCT CH1, FUNCT CH2, FUNCT Ch1&2
             INPUT CH1, INPUT CH2, INPUT Ch1&2
             DIG IN CH1, DIG IN CH2, DIG CH1&2
Description:
    FUNCT...:
            Monitoring the filtered signal of the @93[analyzer].
            The residual signal of @25[THD+N] measurement can
            be monitored directly too (not available in
            @1014[high rate mode] of UPL-B29).
            As the residual signal is often very faint it
            has to be amplified by a high @611[Pre Gain] ear
            protection especially when using head phones
            see @564[speaker].
    DIG IN ...:
            Monitoring the unfiltered input signal of the
            option digital audio.
    INPUT ...:
            Monitoring the unfiltered and ranged input
            signal of the analogue parts of the UPL.
            Available in both analogue instruments.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @564[Speaker Output]   @611[Pregain]   @15[Turning Off]   @612[Volume]


.611
TITLE: Command: FN_PGAIN

PRE GAIN allows the entry of a filter correction factor

Selectable:  factor from -120dB to 120dB

Description:
    If the @610[source] is set to FUNCT.., the signal after
    the internal filters is put to the speaker. These
    filter may introduce a unknown gain to the signal
    path (i.e. FILE DEF). This unknown gain may be
    corrected with this setting, before the signal
    goes to the digital-analogue converters.

    When using standard filters 0dB should be set.

Note:
    If the signal contains DC (either from the DUT or
    from the A/D of the @1[UPL]), a large pre gain may
    overdrive the D/A converter of the speaker output.
    In this case the AC part can't be heard.
Solution:
    Add a high pass filter to suppress DC.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @610[Source]   @564[Speaker Output]   @612[Volume]


.612
TITLE: Command: FN_SPVOL

Spk Volume sets die Volume of the internal speaker.

Selectable:  0 .. 100 %%

Description:
    The volume is set with a logarithmic scale.

    Other possibility for volume control:

    Pressing the key '+/-' (or '#') calls a small menu,
    which allows the setting of the speaker volume with
    the knob or with the cursor keys.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @610[Source]   @564[Speaker Output]   @15[Turning Off]


.613
TITLE: Command: FN_PHONE

Phone Out selects the coupling of the phone output.

Selectable:  ð SPEAKER, PERMANENT

Description:
    ð SPEAKER:   If speaker is turned off, phone out is
                 turned off, too.
    PERMANENT:   phone out is always active, even if
                 speaker is turned off.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @610[Source]   @564[Speaker Output]   @15[Turning Off]


.! @614=TITLE: Command: SN1_DAT1 = Func Result Ch1
.614
TITLE: Function: WAVEFORM

Analyzer acts as simple oscilloscope. A time domain view
of digital audio signal is possible with this function.
With the instruments ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL, channels
are handled as on a standard scope (the horizontal axis
of both channel are correlated). With the instrument
ANLG 100kHz both traces are triggered on their own.

Subcommands:
 -@531[Meas Mode]:     Mode
 -@605[Trig Level]:    Trigger Level
 -@606[Trig Slope]:    Trigger Slope
 -@607[Interpol]:      Smoothing of the curve
 -@608[Trace Len]:     Sampled time in sec
 -@609[Trig Src]:      active trigger channel or
                       generator burst.

The scaling of the result is set in the @91[DISPLAY panel].

The trace memory of the scope in Mode 
STANDARD and COMPRESSED is limited to 7488 samples;
the UPD can handle larger records (up to 64 k).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @2[All panels]   @528[Other functions]   @37[delay measurement]


.615
TITLE: Command: SN1_DAT2

Func Result Ch2

.!---------------- FILTER-Panel
.616
TITLE: Filter-Command: FL_IN_SL

intern only!
dummy!

.617
TITLE: Filter: Command FL1_TYPE

Filter defines the type of filter to be defined.
A defined filter may be selected in the @93[ANALYZER].

Selectable:  HPASS, LPASS, BPASS, BSTOP, NOTCH,
             1/3 OCTAVE, OCTAVE, FILE-DEF

Description:
    All filters have 8 poles and zeroes and a ripple
    of 0.1 dB in the passband.

    HPASS:    Highpass with given @619 [passband] and
              @627 [attenuation].
    LPASS:    Lowpass with given @619 [passband] and
              @627 [attenuation].
    BPASS:    Bandpass with given @620 [lower passband],
              @621 [upper passband] and @627 [attenuation].
    BSTOP:    Bandstop with given @620 [lower passband],
              @621 [upper passband] and @627 [attenuation].
    NOTCH:    Bandstop with given @622 [center], @623 [width]
              and @627 [attenuation].
    1/3 OCT:  Bandpass at the given @622 [center], width
              is 0.231 * center  (Passband ranges from
              center/1.122 up to center*1.122).
    OCTAVE:   Bandpass at the given @622 [center], width
              is 0.707 * center  (Passband ranges from
              center/1.414 up to center*1.414).
    FILE-DEF: Freely definable filter, read from file
              given with @628 [filename]. Note: a value for
              @634[delay] should be given.

Note: For OCTAVE and 1/3 OCTAVE filters the 0,1dB-bandwidth
      is reduced in order to obtain an attenuation of 3 dB
      at the cut-off frequencies. Hence the effective
      bandwidth is lower than the theoretical values.

Get more help about:
@94[FILTER panel]  @32[Filter design]   @69[Optimizing Settling]


.618
TITLE: Command: FL1_DEGR

Selection from:

Description:
  Selection of filter order
  By reducing the filter order from 8 (standard) to 4
  faster but less steep filters can be designed.
  The filter order can individually be selected for each
  high- or low-pass filter.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.619
TITLE: Filter Command FL1_PASS

Passband frequency of lowpass or highpass

Selectable:  any float value in the instrument range.

Description: The given frequency is the passband
             edge of the designed filter, not the 3dB
             point.

see also: @617 [Filter type]




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]  @32[Filter design]


.620
TITLE: FILTER command FL1_PBLW

Passbd low defines the lower passband edge

Selectable:  any frequency value in the measurement
             range

Description: This value is used as a base for the design
             process of the filters @32[Filter design].
             Frequencies at the limit of the measurement
             range (i.e. 4 Hz or 20 kHz) may result in a
             noisy or even unstable filter.
             The given frequency is the passband edge of
             the designed filter, not the 3 dB point.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]  @32 [Filter design]


.621
TITLE: FILTER-Command FL1_PBUP

Passbd upp defines the upper passband edge

Selectable:  any frequency value in the measurement
             range

Description: this value is used as a base for the design
             process of the filters. See also:
             @620 [Passband lower]





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]  @32 [Filter design]


.622
TITLE: Command: FL1_CNTR

Center defines the center frequency of NOTCH, OCT FLT
         and 1/3 OCT FLT.

Selectable: any frequency

Description:
    The filter width specified under @623[Width] is given
    symmetrically about the center frequency.

Notes:
    The preferred frequencies for 3rd octave filters:
    10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, ...
    The lower and upper filter passband edges are
    center/ 1.122462048 and center * 1.122462048.

    The preferred frequencies for octave filters.
    10, 16, 31.5, 63, 125, 250, 500, 1000, ...
    The lower and upper filter passband edges are
    center/ 1.4142 and center * 1.4142.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]


.623
TITLE: Command: FL1_WIDT

Width sets the passband width of a NOTCH filter.

Selectable:  any frequency values

Description:
    The given width is positioned geometrically symmetric
    around the @622[center frequency].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]  @32[Filter design]


.624
TITLE: FILTER-Command FL1_STOP

Stopband shows the stopband edge after the design process

Selectable:  VIEW ONLY!

Description: valid only after design process (a design
             process is performed, when the filter is
             selected in the current ANALYZER function.)






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]  @32[Filter design]


.625
TITLE: FILTER-Command FL1_SPLW

Stopbd low shows the lower stopband edge after the design
process.

Selectable:  VIEW ONLY!

Description: valid only after design process (a design
             process is performed, when the filter is
             selected in the current ANALYZER function.)





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]  @32 [Filter design]


.626
TITLE: FILTER-Command FL1_SPUP

Stopbd upp shows the upper stopband edge after the design
process.

Selectable:  VIEW ONLY!

Description: valid only after design process (a design
             process is performed, when the filter is
             selected in the current ANALYZER function.)





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]  @32[Filter design]


.627
TITLE: Filter Command: FL1_ATTN

attenuation defines the stop band attenuation of filter

Selectable:  any value from 10 to 120 dB

Description: The defined filter is designed with the
             given attenuation or a higher one. After
             the design process the resulting attenua-
             tion is shown.

             Only attenuations which are in the filter
             reference file 'ref_lp.rlp' can be designed.

             If the filter does not meet the specified
             attenuation, a @69[longer settling time] may help.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]  @32[Filter design]


.628
TITLE: Filter Command FL1_FILE

Filename of file containing the filter coefficients

Selectable:  any valid @9[DOS filename]

Description: The given file is read at start of measure-
             ment.

Note: Control the @634[filter delay] and correct it
      if necessary.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @32[Filter design]


.!
.! FL1_FIL0 - FL1_FIL4
.634
TITLE: Command: FL1_DELY

Delay sets the settling time for user filters

Selectable:  time value (sec).

Description:
    On measurements with filters the settling time is
    skipped and then the measurement is started.

    On selecting a user filter, the UPL calculates
    a delay, which is the default value for this field.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]     @32[Filter design]    @69[improving settling]


.635
TITLE: FILTER-Command: FL1_SNAM

Shortname shows the short mnemonic name of the designed
filter, which appears as a selectable item when choosing
a filter.

Selectable:  VIEW ONLY!

Description: Filter names are abbreviated as follows:
             HPASS: HP,   LPASS: LP,   BPASS:      BP
             BSTOP: BS,   NOTCH: NO,   1/3 OCTAVE: TO
             OCTAVE:OC,   FILE-DEF: FI
             followed by the (lower) passband frequency
             or center frequency.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]  @94[FILTER panel]  @32[Filter design]


.!
.! von @636 = FL2_TYPE bis @788 = FL_DUMMY wird nie angesprungen
.! frei
.!--------------- DISPLAY-Panel
.789
TITLE: Command: DS_IW_SL
intern only!
.790
TITLE: Command: DS_DISCO

internal only!
(Display Configuration)

.791
TITLE: Command: DS_TR_OP

OPERATION sets the display mode of the @90[GRAPH panels].

Selectable:  SWEEP LIST, SWP LIM REP, BARGRAPH, CURVE PLOT,
             SPECTR LIST, SPC LIM REP, SPECTRUM,
             PROTOCOL, PROTO AUTO

Description:
    SWEEP LIST: Display of measurement results as a list
    SWP LIM REP:Display of out-of-tolerance values of the
                DUT (for sweep)
    SPC LIM REP:Display of out-of-tolerance values of the
                DUT (for @30[FFT] or @584[Post FFT])
    BARGRAPH:   Bargraph display of measurement results
                with min-max indication
                (can be reset by pressing @16[START]).
    CURVE PLOT: SWEEP curve made up of individual
                measurements or @614[waveform].
    SPECTRUM:   spectral display; only possible with @30[FFT]
                or measurement with @584[Post FFT].
                Linegraphics with: @24[THD], @26[MOD DIST], @28[DFD],
                                  @155[3rd OCTAVE], @220[12th OCTAVE]
    SPECTR LIST: Listing of spektral values.
    PROTOCOL:   An @801[analysis] of the protocol information
                supplied with the AES/EBU signal is shown
                in the GRAPH panel. (item appears only if
                @93[analyzer] is set to DIGITAL and the
                measurement function PROTOCOL is active).
                If @792[Source] CHAN STAT is selected a @800[Proto File]
                can be loaded to decode channel status data in
                consumer or professional format.
    PROTO AUTO: same as PROTOCOL, but @800[Proto File] is loaded
                automatically depending on 'professional'-bit in
                channel state data.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   Display @807[Mode]


.792
TITLE: Command: DS_EB_SR

Source selects the data to be interpreted.

Selectable:  CHAN STAT L, CHAN STAT R, USER L, USER R

Description:
    CHAN STAT L:    Channel status data left is displayed.
    CHAN STAT R:    Channel status data right is displayed.
    USER L:         User data left is displayed.
    USER R:         User data right is displayed.

Note: User data are interpreted 'block aligned'.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]    @794[User file]   @800[Status file]
@801[protocol screen]   @805[Dump of user data]


.793
TITLE: Command: DS_EB_US

Format selects how user data is be interpreted.

.!Selectable:  BIN, HEX, ASCII, AES18, FILE_DEF
Selectable:  BIN, HEX, ASCII, FILE_DEF

Description:
    BIN:      User data are displayed as 01010 sequence.
              Interpretation is block aligned.
              C:\UPL\REF\BINARY.PAU is used as protocol
              file.
    HEX:      User data are displayed as HEX numbers.
              Interpretation is block aligned.
              C:\UPL\REF\HEX.PAU is used as protocol file.
    ASCII:    User data are displayed as text.
              Interpretation is block aligned.
              C:\UPL\REF\ASCII.PAU is used as protocol file
.!    AES18:    User data are displayed as defined in AES18
.!              (HDLC)
.!              (This function is not yet implemented).
    FILE_DEF: User data are displayed according to the
              definitions given in the @794[Protocol file].

If an analysis in AES18 Mode is needed, please contact R&S.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @805[Dump]


.794
TITLE: Command: DS_US_FL

Proto File selects the interpretation file for user data.

Selectable:  @9[Filename], default file extension: *.PAU

Description:
   see @800[protocol file for channel status data].

Example: see R&S_AES3.PAU




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @801[Protocol screen]   @802[file format]
@805[Dump of user data]


.! DS_US0FL - DS_US4FL
.800
TITLE: Command: DS_ST_FL

Proto File selects the interpretation file for channel
status data. (Only if @791[OPERATION] is set to PROTOCOL.

Selectable:  @9[Filename], default file extension: *.PAC

Description:
   The lines in the user area of the @801[protocol screen]
   are formatted according to the @802[definitions] given in
   the file. Every group of bits may have an output field
   assigned; any value may be translated to free definable
   output text. The file may be adapted by the customer
   to any protocol definition.

Example: see \UPL\USER\R&S_AES3.PAC

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @792[Data source]


.! @801-@785 DS_ST0FL - DS_ST4FL
.801
TITLE: About PROTOCOL SCREEN

The protocol screen is split into two areas:
 - The two top lines are preformatted and show information
   about validity, parity, occurred errors and changes in
   the channel status data.
 - the lower 13 lines are user-defined and are formatted
   according to the definitions given in the @800[Proto File].
   (@802[Notes on file format])

Possible errors shown in the top lines:
    - LOCK:     receiver is not locked.
    - CONFIDEN: data susp.
    - CODING:   error in coding rules.
    - NONE:     all okay

The message at the field "Change" means:
    - NO:       no change since last update
    - LTC:      only bits 112-143 (=local timecode) and
                184-191 (=CRC) have changed
    - YES:      any bit has changed

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @792[Data source]   @87[Protocol Generator]


.802
TITLE: About PROTOCOL Definition File (1)

In the @800[Protocol definition file] the formatting of
@801[Protocol screen] can be laid down. Each line of the file
contains an instruction:

PRINT   1,  2, "Example"
    In line 2 of column 1, the text "Example" will be
    output.

VALUE   17, 2, BIT:0,    0="cons",  1="prof"
    In line 2 of column 17, the contents of bit 0 will be
    output, 0 will be converted to "cons" und 1 to "prof".

@803[Further instructions]

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @801[protocol screen]   @65[BAL (XLR)]


.803
TITLE: About PROTOCOL definition file (2)

Instructions in the @800[Protocol definition file]:

VALUE   17,11, CRC_L_ERR
    In line 11 of column 17, the contents of the CRC error
    counter (left) will be output.
    Further variables: CRC_R_ERR, @804[MEASURED_RATE],
                       SET_RATE
TEXT    39, 8, BIT:80-111
    In line 8 of column 39, the contents of bits 80 will
    be output  as a text in ASCII (non printable chars
    are displayed as ? or as ú if 0)
TIME    17, 9, BIT:112-143, RATE:@804[MEASURED_RATE]
    In line 9 of column 17, the contents of bits 112 to 143
    will be output as time data with a prior division by
    RATE (=MEASURED_RATE or SET_RATE or a number).

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @801[Protocol screen]   @804[rate measurement]


.804
TITLE: About rate measurement on Digital Audio

The @1[UPL] can measure the sample rate on the
digital input. Select COMMON/INP in the field
@426[Meas Mode] and switch the FREQ setting to
SAMPLE FREQ.


If the instruction MEASURED_RATE is given in the
@800[Protocol definition file] for the @803[keyword]
VALUE the measured sample rate is displayed.

If the measurement fails "RATE ??" is displayed.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @801[Protocol screen]   @65[BAL (XLR)]


.805
TITLE: About Dumping User Bits

Sorry, this function is UPD only.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @792[Data source]   @801[Protocol Screen]


.806
TITLE: Command: DS_VW_IM

IEC-Bus only!
Plot immediate

.807
TITLE: DISPLAY command: DS_TR_MD

With FFT, Scans sets the graphic display mode.

Selectable: DEL BEF WR, MAX HOLD, WATERFALL.

Description:
    DEL BEF WR: Each new FFT overwrites the last one.
    MAX HOLD:   The maximum of all curves is hold;
                @21[RMS] result of @30[FFT] is disabled.
                @589[Avg Count] must be set to 1.
    WATERFALL:  The existing curves are shifted to the
                top right prior to a new graphic output
                and are partly covered by new outputs
                (waterfall mode).
            !-> menu item appears during single channel
                measurement only; @838[TRACE B] is forced
                off.

Notes on WATERFALL (display mode):
  - The X-axis should have space to the right!
  - The Y-axis should have space to the top!
  - Noise should be (partly) blanked out by
    the screen bottom edge.
  - @588[average] influences waterfall when sweeping.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.808
TITLE: Command: DS_TRCNT

Scan Count defines the number of scans which are measured
and shown before sweep stops.

Scan Count defines wether a single trace (Scan Count = 1)
or a group of traces (Scan Count >= 2) is shown on screen,
internally stored or written to or read from file.

Selectable: integer number

Description:
  Scan Count = 1
    Only 1 single curve or @810[a pair of curves] (Trace A and B)
    is to be recorded or loaded from file. Each new curve
    overwrites the old one. If continuous sweep (without
    Z-Axis) is selected it will run forever; storing the
    trace will only store the last run.
    A single scan trace loaded from file will overwrite the
    current contents of the concerning trace.
    A multi scan trace loaded from file will overwrite the
    current contents of the 1st scan; the other scans will
    be omitted.

  Scan Count >1
    Not only a single scan or sweep pass but a preselectable
    number of scans can be recorded and painted on screen.
    The number of internally stored or loaded scans,
    however, is limited to the value of 'Scan Count', at
    most 17. The scans that are not stored are lost when
    - graphic is rescaled or repainted,
    - traces are stored to or loaded from file
    - 'ACTUAL+DATA' setups are stored or loaded
    If continuous sweep (without Z-Axis) is selected it will
    be terminated after 'Scan Count' passes; storing the
    trace will only store the last 17 passes.
    A single scan trace loaded from file will be appended to
    the currently existing scans.
    A multi scan trace loaded from file will clear the trace
    buffer and load all or the first 'Scan Count' scans,
    whatever is less.
    If more than 'Scan Count' scans are recorded, only the
    last scans are stored.
    If 'Scan Count' is greater than 17, only the last 17
    scans are stored.

Note:
    The START key will clear all existing sweep data

    For further information see chapter
    2.9.3.3 'Scan Count > 1' and
    2.11.8 Several Sweep Curves in one diagram
    in UPL Operation Manual.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.809
TITLE: Command: DS_US_UN

User Label enables the entry of 'free' text for labels
and units.

Selectable:  ON or OFF

Description:
    ON:   a free text can be entered for the @869[X axis]
          and the Y axis of traces @818[A] and @847[B].
          The text strings are predefined with the
          selected units and measurement function
          of the UPL.
    OFF:  the selected units of the DISPLAY panel are used.

Note: The label string is not changed when the measurement
    function changes.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.810
TITLE: Command: DS_TR_FD

TRACE A selects the information to be displayed.

Selection from:  OFF, HOLD, FILE, FUNC CH1, FUNC CH2,
                 DUAL FILE

Description:
    OFF:        no display
    HOLD:       the current display is fixed
    FILE:       display of @811[file]. When file means
                a DUAL FILE, curve A will be load.
    FUNC CH1:
    FUNC CH2:   display of result of @528[measurement function].
                Only channels, which are measured, can be
                selected.
    DUAL FILE:  read a pair of curves from file (both
                traces A and B).

Notes: If a trace is linked to a channel and this channel
    is turned off, the trace selection is modified by the
    UPL to a reasonable setting.
    FILE may be loaded only if a SWEEP is set. Points in
    the file are recalculated to the currently used SWEEP
    points. If the SWEEP parameter have been changed
    between storing and loading of a trace, the loaded
    curved may look different because of the recalculation.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.811
TITLE: Command: MM_LDTR1

Filename sets the file of @810[TRACE A] to be displayed.

Selection from: @9[filename]

Description:
   If no sweep is active the file will be loaded to trace A.
   If any sweep is selected the file will be interpolated
   to trace A.
   If file contains only 1 trace and @808[Scan Count] is > 1
   the data of this file will be added to current
   trace A data.
   default file extension: *.trc




Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.spv


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.! MM_LDT00 - MM_LDT04
.817
TITLE: Command: DS_TR_UN

Unit: Setting of the Y unit for @810[TRACE A].

Selectable:   according to selected @425[analyzer]
              @82[digital] or @81[analogue] units.

Description:  this setting is preset from the @543[unit]
              of the @528[measurement function] and may be
              changed here to a different setting.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.818
TITLE: Command: DS_1Y_US

Unit/Label defines the labelling of the y axis of @810[TRACE A].

Selectable:   string entry

Description:
    The given string is interpreted as follows:
    - the first 5 characters are used as unit text.
    - the next 12 characters form the title above the
      graphic (centered and filled up with blanks,
      if necessary).

Note: The label string is not changed when the measurement
    function changes.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY-Panel]   @809[user defined units]


.! @819 - @823  DS_1Y_U0-DS_1Y_U4
.824
TITLE: Command: DS_1Y_RM

Reference or Limit Ref selects how the reference for
relative entries for @810[TRACE A] is fixed.

Selectable:  OTHER TRACE, MAX, o CURSOR, * CURSOR, VALUE:,
             GEN TRACK, MEAS CH1, MEAS CH2, FILE, HOLD,
             FILE INTERN

Description:
    Reference related entries (i.e. dBr) in the @90[Graph panel]
    are related to this value.
    OTHER TRACE: the sweep curve of the other channel is
            used as reference. (not for SPECTRUM)
    MAX:    Reference value is the maximum of the current
            sweep or spectrum.
    o CURSOR, * CURSOR: Reference value is the current
            cursor position.
    GEN TRACK: Reference values are loaded online from the
            current @92[generator] output level resp.
            output frequency.
    VALUE:  @825[manual setting]
    FILE:   Reference values are taken from a separate @826[file]
    MEAS CH1: Reference value is the current measurement
            result of channel 1. With a frequency display,
            the frequency value is used, with a function
            display the current measurement result is used.
            (only if channel 1 on, not for SPECTRUM and
            @614[WAVEFORM]).
    MEAS CH2: same as MEAS CH1.
    HOLD:   The currently used reference values are fixed.
    FILE INTERN: The reference values from the file
            loaded with @810[trace A] are used.

Note:
    If no reference relation is chosen, the reference values
    are used for the limit checking.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]
.!@1005[Conv Fact]


.825
TITLE: Command: DS_1Y_RL

Value for @824[Reference].

Selectable:   value is set in the selected
              @817[display unit] of @810[TRACE A].

Description:
    Relative displays are related to this value.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.826
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_1Y_RF

Name of a file containing the @824[reference] curve.

Selectable:  @9[filename]

Description:
    default file extension: .trc



Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.trc



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.! @827 - @831  DS_1Y_R0-DS_1Y_R4
.832
TITLE: Display Command DS_1Y_NM

Normalize enables a multiplier on the reference curve;
Therefore the measurement curve can be shifted to the
desired Y position.

Selectable: VALUE, o-CURSOR, *-CURSOR

Description:
  VALUE:    @833[Setting] of a multplier value
  o-CURSOR, *-CURSOR:
            The multiplier is calulated from the measurement
            value at the cursor position divided by the current
            reference value at the cursor position.
            The new reference value is then equal to the
            measurement value. (= 0 dBr).
  
Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.833
TITLE: Display Command DS_1Y_NL

Setting of the multiplication factor for reference
values.

Selectable:  floating point number

The value given here is multiplied with the current
reference value. Therefore the reference of a
measurement curve is adjustable to any need.
(for example: calibration of the measurement curve
to 0dBr at 1kHz).



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY-Panel]   @832[Normalize]


.834
TITLE: Command: DS_1Y_AT

Scale defines the fixing of the scale of @810[TRACE A].

Selectable:  MANUAL, AUTO ONCE

Description:
    MANUAL:    manual setting of display parameters for
               @836[Top] and @837[Bottom].
    AUTO ONCE: The Y scaling is adapted to the analyzer
               settings or if a trace exists, to the
               measurement trace.
               The command is executed on the closing of
               the box.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.835
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_1Y_SP

Spacing sets the subdivision mode of Y axis of @810[TRACE A].

Selection from: LIN or LOG

Description:
    LIN:  linear subdivision from @836[Top] to @837[Bottom].

    LOG:  logarithmic subdivision from @836[Top] to @837[Bottom].

Note: If the @817[Unit] is logarithmic (i.e. dBV), only
      LIN is available.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.836
TITLE: DISPLAY command: DS_1Y_TP

Top specifies the top edge of the graphic scaling.

Selectable:   Any level

Description:
    Top and @837[Bottom] specify the graphic display range
    in the y-direction for channel A. Top must always
    be greater than bottom. An entry for top is therefore
    not possible that is smaller than bottom (--> adjust
    Bottom first).
    Units that can be selected for top is determined by the
    selected analyzer.
    Labelling is selected by means of the setting of @817[Unit].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @90[GRAPH panel]


.837
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_1Y_BT

Bottom defines the lower edge of the graphic scaling for
@810[TRACE A].

Selectable:   Any level

Description:
    @836[Top] and Bottom define the graphic display range
    in the y-direction for channel B. Top must always be
    greater than Bottom so that a value for Bottom that is
    greater than Bottom is not accepted (--> adjust Top
    first).
    The selectable units for Bottom depend on the activated
    analyzer.
    Labelling is selected by means of @817[Unit] settings.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @90[GRAPH panel]


.838
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_TR2FD

TRACE B selects the information to be displayed.

Selection from:  OFF, HOLD, FILE, FUNC CH1, FUNC CH2,
                 DUAL FILE,

Description:
    OFF:        no display
    HOLD:       the current display is fixed
    FILE:       display of @839[file]. When file means
                a DUAL FILE, curve B will be load.
    FUNC CH1:
    FUNC CH2:   display of result of @528[measurement function].
                Only channels, which are measured, can be
                selected.
    DUAL FILE:  This setting is automatically selected if
                a pair of curves has been loaded from file
                with the @810[Trace A] command.

Notes: - If a trace is linked to a channel and this channel
         is turned off, the trace selection is modified by
         the UPL to a reasonable setting.
       - The scaling may be equal or different to @810[TRACE A];
         see @845[Scale B].
       - If the display @807[Mode] is set to WATERFALL, TRACE B
         is forced off. No other selection is possible in
         such a case.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.839
TITLE: Command: MM_LDTR2

Filename sets the file of @838[TRACE B] to be displayed.

Selection from: @9[filename]

Description:
   If no sweep is active the file will be loaded to trace B.
   If any sweep is selected the file will be interpolated
   to trace B.
   If file contains only 1 trace and @808[Scan Count] is > 1
   the data of this file will be added to current
   trace B data.
   predefinded file extension: *.trc




Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.spv


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.! MM_LDT00 - MM_LDT04
.845
TITLE: DISPLAY command: DS_2Y_EQ

Scale B defines whether the scaling of TRACE B is
identical with that of TRACE A or not.

Selectable:  EQUAL A or NOT EQUAL A

Description:
    EQUAL A:     TRACE B uses the same y scaling as
        TRACE A.
    NOT EQUAL A: The scaling of TRACE B can be set
        independently of TRACE A, even if the same
        graphic display is chosen for the two traces.
        The scale for TRACE B appears on the right
        next to the graphic display.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.846
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_2Y_UN

Unit defines setting of the Y unit for @838[TRACE A].

Selectable:   according to selected @425[analyzer]
              @82[digital] or @81[analogue] units.

Description:  this setting is preset from the @543[unit]
              of the @528[measurement function] and may be
              changed here to a different setting.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @93[ANALYZER panel]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.847
TITLE: Command: DS_2Y_US

Unit/Label defines the labelling of the y axis of @838[trace B].

Selectable:   string entry

Description:
    See @818[label command of trace A].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY-Panel]   @809[user defined units]


.! @848 - @852  DS_2Y_U0-DS_2Y_U4
.853
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_2Y_RM

Reference selects how the reference for relative entries
for @838[TRACE B] is fixed.

Selectable:  OTHER TRACE, MAX, o CURSOR, * CURSOR, VALUE:,
             GEN TRACK, MEAS CH1, MEAS CH2, FILE, HOLD,
             FILE INTERN

Description:
    Reference related entries (i.e. dBr) in the @90[Graph panel]
    are related to this value.
    OTHER TRACE: the sweep curve of the other channel is
            used as reference. (not for SPECTRUM)
    MAX:    Reference value is the maximum of the current
            sweep or spectrum.
    o CURSOR, * CURSOR: Reference value is the current
            cursor position.
    GEN TRACK: Reference values are loaded online from the
            current @92[generator] output level resp.
            output frequency.
    VALUE:  @854[manual setting]
    MEAS CH1: Reference value is the current measurement
            result of channel 1. With a frequency display,
            the frequency value is used, with a function
            display the current measurement result is used.
            (only if channel 1 on, not for SPECTRUM or
            WAVEFORM).
    MEAS CH2: same as MEAS CH1.
    FILE:   Reference values are taken from a separate @853[file]
    HOLD:   The currenty used reference values are fixed.
    FILE INTERN: The reference values from the file
            loaded with @838[trace B] are used.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]
.!@1005[Conv Fact]


.854
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_2Y_RL

Value for @853[Reference].

Selectable:   Value is set in the selected
              @846[display unit] of @838[TRACE B].

Description:
    Relative displays are related to this value.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.855
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_2Y_RF

Name of a file containing the @853[reference] curve.

Selectable:  @9[filename]

Description:
    default file extension: .trc



Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.trc



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.! @856 - @860  DS_2Y_R0-DS_2Y_R4
.861
TITLE: Display Command DS_2Y_NM

Normalize enables a multiplier on the reference curve;
Therefore the measurement curve can be shifted to the
desired Y position.

Selectable: VALUE, o-CURSOR, *-CURSOR

Description:
  VALUE:    @833[Setting] of a multplier value
  o-CURSOR, *-CURSOR:
            The multiplier is calulated from the measurement
            value at the cursor position divided by the current
            reference value at the cursor position.
            The new reference value is then equal to the
            measurement value. (= 0 dBr).
  
Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.862
TITLE: Display Command DS_2Y_NL

Setting of the multiplication factor for reference
values.

Selectable:  floating point number

The value given here is multiplied with the current
reference value. Therefore the reference of a
measurement curve is adjustable to any need.
(for example: calibration of the measurement curve
to 0dBr at 1kHz).



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY-Panel]   @861[Normalize]


.863
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_2Y_AT

Scale defines the fixing of the scale of @838[TRACE B].

Selectable:  MANUAL, AUTO ONCE

Description:
    MANUAL:    manual setting of display parameters for
               @865[Top] and @866[Bottom].
    AUTO ONCE: The Y scaling is adapted to the analyzer
               settings or if a trace exists, to the
               measurement trace.
               The command is executed on the closing of
               the box.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.864
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_2Y_SP

Spacing sets the subdivision mode of Y axis of @838[TRACE B].

Selection from: LIN or LOG

Description:
    LIN:  linear subdivision from @865[Top] to @866[Bottom].

    LOG:  logarithmic subdivision from @865[Top] to @866[Bottom].

Note: If the @846[Unit] is logarithmic (i.e. dBV), only
      LIN is available.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.865
TITLE: DISPLAY command: DS_2Y_TP

Top command defines the upper edge of the graphic scaling.

Selectable:   Any level

Description:
    Top and @866[Bottom] define the graphic display range
    in the y-direction for channel B. Top must always be
    greater than Bottom so that a value for Top that is
    less than Bottom is not accepted (--> adjust Bottom
    first).
    The selectable units for Top depend on the activated
    analyzer.
    Labelling is selected by means of @846[Unit] settings.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @90[GRAPH panel]


.866
TITLE: Command: DS_2Y_BT

Bottom defines the lower edge of the graphic scaling for
@838[TRACE B].

Selectable:   Any level

Description:
    @865[Top] and Bottom define the graphic display range
    in the y-direction for channel B. Top must always be
    greater than Bottom so that a value for Bottom that is
    greater than Bottom is not accepted (--> adjust Top
    first).
    The selectable units for Bottom depend on the activated
    analyzer.
    Labelling is selected by means of @846[Unit] settings.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @90[GRAPH panel]


.867
TITLE: Command: DS_X_FE

intern only!
Dim of X-axis

.868
TITLE: Command: DS_X_UN

Unit sets the measurement unit of the x axis.












Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.869
TITLE: Command: DS_X_US

Unit/Label defines the labelling of the x axis.

Selectable:   string entry

Description:
    The given string is interpreted as follows:
    - the first 5 characters are used as unit text.
    - the next 12 characters form the title above the
      graphic (centered and filled up with blanks,
      if necessary).

Note: The label string is not changed when the measurement
    function changes.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY-Panel]   @809[user defined units]


.! @870 - @874 DS_X_US0-DS_X_US4
.875
TITLE: Command: DS_X_RL

Reference sets the reference value for relative X-axis
co-ordinates.

Selectable:   depending on the physical unit of the x axis
              frequency or level

Description:
    relative settings are referred to this value.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]   @80[Frequency units]


.876
TITLE: Command: DS_X_AT

Scale command specifies the way in which the X-axis is
defined.

Selectable:  MANUAL or AUTO

Description:
    MANUAL: Fixing the X-axis with the following settings:
            @877[Spacing]:  LIN or LOG
            @877[Left]:     left edge
            @877[Right]:    right edge
    AUTO:   The displayed X range is taken from the current
            analyzer function or from the measurement trace

            see also:
            @877[Spacing]:  LIN or LOG

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.877
TITLE: Command: DS_X_SP

Spacing sets the subdivision mode of X axis.

Selection from: LIN or LOG

Description:
    LIN:  linear subdivision from @878[left] to @879[right].

    LOG:  logarithmic subdivision from @878[left] to @879[right].

Note: Output data of @30[FFT] is subdivided linearly,
      therefore a logarithmic setting is not meaningful.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.878
TITLE: Command: DS_X_LF

Left set the left border of the measurement window.

Selectable:  Frequency in Hz

Description:
    A sweep or a @30[FFT] generates a graphic. This graphic
    is displayed on the screen in the range from @878[left]
    to @879[right].
    @877[Spacing] fixes the subdivision of the X-axis.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.879
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_X_RG

Right set the right border of the measurement window.

Selection from:  Frequency setting

Description:
    A sweep or a @30[FFT] generates a graphic. This graphic
    is displayed in the range from @878[left] to @879[right]
    on the screen.
    @877[Spacing] selects the subdivision of the x-axis
    (LIN or LOG).



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @91[DISPLAY panel]


.880
TITLE: DISPLAY command MM_TI_LM

Headline: LIMIT CHECK
.881
TITLE: DISPLAY command CL_LM_UL

Mode selects the limit curve to be displayed.

Selection from:  OFF, LOWER, UPPER, LOW&UP

Description:
    OFF:     no limit curve
    LOWER:   only upper limit curve
    UPPER:   only lower limit curve
    LOW&UP:  both limit curves

Notes: Only for @30[FFT] (not for @584[Post-FFT]) the
    limit checked against the spectrum; in all other
    case limit is testet on the curve plot (sweep).
    Therefore limits are forced to OFF if a spectrum
    of a Post-FFT is displayed.
  - Limit is OFF at Waveform and PROTOCOL.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.882
TITLE: DISPLAY command CL_LM_ON

Check selects the TRACE to be checked against limits.

Selection from:  @810[TRACE A] or @838[TRACE B]

Description:
    TRACE A: control of trace A
    TRACE B: control of trace B

Note: @810[TRACE A] and @838[TRACE B] are related to
      channels and measurement function in the
      @91[DISPLAY panel].


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.883
TITLE: DISPLAY command CL_LU_MD

Lim Upper selects how the upper limit is fixed.

Selection from:  VALUE: or FILE

Description:
    VALUE:  lower limit is set by a @884[Data entry].
    FILE:   lower limit is read in from a file.
            @885[Filename] specifies the file.


Notes: see at @881[Lim Lower]



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @9[Filename]


.884
TITLE: DISPLAY command CL_LM_UP

Value sets @883[Lim Upper].

Selection from:  any number in the given range

Description:
    The limit and units are dependent of the TRACE and
    associated channel selected with @882[Check].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.885
TITLE: DISPLAY command MM_LLUNM

Name of a file containing the @883[upper limit] curve.

Selectable:  @9[filename]

Description:
    default file extension: .lup



Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.lup



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.! 584 - 588 MM_LLUN0 - MM_LLUN4
.891
TITLE: DISPLAY command CL_LL_MD

Lim Lower selects how the lower limit is set.

Selection from:  VALUE: or FILE

Description:
    VALUE:  lower limit is set by a @892[Data entry].
    FILE:   lower limit is read from a file.
            see @893[Filename].





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]    @9[filename]


.892
TITLE: DISPLAY command CL_LM_LW

Value sets @891[Lim Lower].

Selection from:  any number in the given range

Description:
    The limit and units are dependent of the TRACE and
    associated channel selected with @882[Check].






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.893
TITLE: DISPLAY command MM_LLLNM

Name of a file containing the @891[lower limit] curve.

Selectable:  @9[filename]

Description:
    default file extension: .llw



Example: see c:\UPL\user\r&s_exam.llw



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.! @894-@898 filename
.899
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_TX_ST

Comment enables a comment string in the measurement window.

Selection from:  any text

Description:
    The text is positioned with @905[X Pos] and @906[Y Pos].
    The UPL tries to position the text inside the
    window.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]   @962[print comment]


.! .600-.604 comment
.905
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_TX_X

X Pos sets the horizontal position of the @899[comment text].

Selectable:  0 .. 100 %%

Description:
    0%% is at the left border of the measurement window,
    100%% is at right border.
    The UPL tries to position the text inside the
    window.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.906
TITLE: DISPLAY command DS_TX_Y

Y Pos sets the vertical position of the @899[comment text].

Selection from:  0 .. 100 %%

Description:
    0%% is at the lower border of the measurement window,
    100%% is at upper border.
    The UPL tries to position the text inside the
    window.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @91[DISPLAY panel]


.907
TITLE: Command: DS_1Y_ON

Softkey: Trace A on;

Selectable:   !

Description:
    no help on softkeys up to now!









.908
TITLE: Command: DS_2Y_ON

Softkey: @838[TRACE B] on;

Auswahl aus:

Beschreibung:
    keine Hilfe zu Softkeys!








.909
TITLE: Command: DS_AT_AL
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.910
TITLE: Command: DS_CR_AC
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.911
TITLE: Command: DS_CR1MD
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|

Softkey: set Cursor 1 mode



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.912
TITLE: Command: DS_CR1PM
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.913
TITLE: Command: DS_CR1PV
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.914
TITLE: Command: DS_CR2MD
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.915
TITLE: Command: DS_CR2PM
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.916
TITLE: Command: DS_CR2PV
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.917
TITLE: Command: DS_CR3PV
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.918
TITLE: Command: DS_ZM_MD
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.919
TITLE: Command: DS_ZM_CN
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.920
TITLE: Command: DS_ST_RF
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.921
TITLE: Command: DS_TR1MM
|--------------------- lineal ----------------------------|


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.922
TITLE: Command: DS_TR2MM


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.923
TITLE: Command: DS_TR1HM

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.924
TITLE: Command: DS_TR2HM

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.925
TITLE: Command: DS_TRIDX

changed with @73[page up/down]

intern only

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.926
TITLE: Command: DS_TR_KP

Softkey: Keep Last Trace

    no help on softkeys!

.927
TITLE: Command: DS_RMK

intern only!
roll key

.928
TITLE: Command: DS_DUMMY

intern only!
dummy!

.929
TITLE: Command: FE_IN_SL

intern only!
dummy!

.930
TITLE: FILE command MM_TI_LS

Headline: LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE
.931
TITLE: Command: MM_AP_MD

Preselection of application to be selectable in @934[Filename].

Selectable:  USER DEF,
             ANLG-ANLG, ANLG-DIGI, DIGI-ANLG, DIGI-DIGI   

Description:
  USER DEF:  User definable application.
             User can select which @932[kind of setup]
             is displayed and which @934[file] is to be loaded.
             Note: USER DEF has to be selected to load
                 Default setup or to view PCX pictures
  ANLG-ANLG: list applications using analog generator and
             analog analyzer 
  ANLG-DIGI: list applications using analog generator and
             digital analyzer 
  DIGI-ANLG: list applications using digital generator and
             analog analyzer 
  DIGI_DIGI: list applications using digital generator and
             digital analyzer 

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @95[File panel]


.932
TITLE: Command: MM_LS_MD

Mode defines what is to be loaded.

Selectable:  DEFAULT, ACTUAL, COMPLETE, SETUP, VIEW PCX 

Description:
  COMPLETE: The setup designated with @934[following input]
            is loaded. It contains all settings and
            @962[additional comment] for printouts.
            (This also takes place on starting the
            program with UPL -sfilename.ext).
            Default file extension: *.SCO
  ACTUAL:   The given partial setup is loaded. It con-
            tains all settings, but not active instru-
            ments and functions are excluded. This
            accelerates loading and @941[storing] and
            the setup file gets smaller.
            'ACTUAL+DATA' setups containing measurement
            values and sweep curves are loaded as well.
            When loading one of these setups all graphic
            data (sweep, FFT, WAVEFORM, etc.) have to be
            loaded and painted, thus total loading time
            is longer then loading time of 'ACTUAL' setup.
            Default file extension: *.SAC
  SETUP:    The file extension determines the type of
            setup file: .sac is loaded as ACTUAL
                        .sco is loaded as COMPLETE
  DEFAULT:  The setup DEFAULT.SET supplied with the UPL
            is loaded.
            (This also takes place on starting the
            program with UPL -d).
  VIEW PCX: The PCX file designated with @934[following input]
            is loaded. The PCX picture is visible until the
            HCOPY key is pressed (to print this PCX picture)
            or any other key is hit.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @95[File panel]


.933
TITLE: Command: INFO_EN

Info Displ enables the display of an info text associated
with a setup.

Selectable: ON or OFF

Description:
    ON: Associated with the setup a @943[short description]
        is stored. This text is displayed in the help
        line at the screen bottom if the @934[file menu]
        is opened.
        The scrolling of the files slows down if
        Info Displ is enabled since each file must
        be opened to get the text.
    OFF: no text display

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @9[Filename]   @943[Info Text]


.934
TITLE: Command: MM_LS_NM

'Filename' specifies the names of the instrument setups to
be loaded or PCX file to be displayed.
'Measuring' opens a dialogbox to select an application.

Selectable:  @8[DOS] @9[filenames] or appliation list

Description:
    The used file extensions are .SCO, .SAC or .PCX,
    depending on the selected @932[Mode].

    The instrument setup DEFAULT.SET is the default setup 
    of the UPL and is loaded automatically on calling the 
    UPL with the option "-d" or when selecting @932[Mode] DEFAULT.

    If a PCX filename is entered in @932[Mode] PCX the PCX 
    picture is displayed on the screen in ist original size. 
    The next keystroke clears the screen and restore the 
    UPL screen.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @9[Filename]   @932[Mode]


.! @935 - @939 MM_LS_N0 - MM_LS_N4
.940
TITLE: FILE command MM_TI_SS

Headline: STORE INSTRUMENT STATE
.941
TITLE: Command: MM_SS_MD

Mode selects the things to be stored.

Selection from:  COMPLETE, ACTUAL, ACTUAL+DATA, ASCII

Description:
    COMPLETE:     The state of the @1[UPL] is stored to
                  the given file. (including print
                  @962[comment] and all inactive instruments
                  and functions).       (*.SCO)
    ACTUAL:       The state of the @1[UPL] is stored to
                  the given file. (only currently
                  active settings). This is smaller and
                  faster.               (*.SAC)
    ACTUAL+DATA:  Like ACTUAL, but measurement values and
                  traces are stored as well.
    ASCII:        The contens of all panels is stored to
                  the given file in ASCII representation,
                  so it can be read with an ASCII editor.
                  The file extension must be 'TXT'.
                  Note: ASCII files can not be loaded as
                        UPL-setup.

The attribute of the stored file is selectable with
@942[Attrib].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @95[FILE panel]   @932[Loading setup]


.942
TITLE: Command: MM_ST_RO

Attrib defines the type of the file stored.

Selectable:  READ ONLY, READ/WRITE

Description:
    READ ONLY:  The stored file may only be read and thus
                cannot be erased or overwritten
                accidentally.
                (To do this the attribute has to be first
                reset with the command ATTRIB -R <file> at
                the @8[DOS] level).

    READ/WRITE: The stored file can be modified in any way.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @95[FILE panel]


.943
TITLE: Command INFO_STR

Info Text is a field for the entry of text describing the
current setup.

Selectable:  text entry

Description:
    The text (max. 40 chars) is stored together with the
    setup. When the setup is loaded, this text is displayed
    during the file menu in the help line.

    The display depends on the @933[Info Displ] setting.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.!  @944-@948 frei
.949
TITLE: Command: MM_SS_NM

Filename specifies the name of the file under which the
instrument setup is stored.

Selectable:  @8[DOS] @9[filenames]

Description:
    The default file extension is .SET

    The  instrument setup DEFAULT.SET is the supplied with
    the UPL and is loaded automatically on calling the UPL
    with the option "-d".

    The instrument setup UPL.SET corresponds to the setup
    saved in the internal memory and will be used if
    the contents of the internal memory is faulty.
    (eg when the battery is flat)

The file attribute is defined with @942[Attrib].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @95[FILE panel]    @9[Filename]


.! .641 - .645 MM_SS_N0 - MM_SS_N4
.955
TITLE: FILE command MM_TI_ST

Headline: STORE TRACE LIST
.956
TITLE: Command: MM_ST_MD

Store selects what is to be stored.

Selectable:   OFF, TRACE A, TRACE B, TRACE A+B,
              DWELL VALUE, EQUALIZATN, LIM REPORT,
              LIM LOWER, LIM UPPER,
              X AXIS, Z AXIS

Description:
    OFF:        Nothing to store
    TRACE A:    Data of @810[TRACE A] (single scan or group)
    TRACE B:    Data of @838[TRACE B] (single scan or group)
    TRACE A+B:  Data of both traces (or both scans groups)
    DWELL VALUE:Buffer of delay times
    EQUALIZATN: Store trace A or B as bias file (.VEQ);
                this file can be read with Equalizer
                in @286[generator] to bias the output or
                in @598[analyzer] to modify the FFT spectrum.
                see @958[Volt Source].
    LIM REPORT: List of limit exceeds
    LIM LOWER:  The lower (resp upper) limit curve is
    LIM UPPER:  stored.
    X AXIS:     Sweep: points of @310[X-Axis]
    Z AXIS:     Sweep: points of @311[Z-Axis]


Hint: A stored trace list may be loaded by selecting
      the respective trace (@810[A] or @838[B]) to display a file.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @95[FILE panel]


.957
TITLE: Command: MM_ST_FR

Format sets the number format for storing a trace list.

Selection from:  REAL, ASCII, EXPORT

Description:
  REAL:   Binary representation according to I453 as
          32 bit float number.
          TRC files are especially short and fast loadable
          to UPL/UPD.
  ASCII:  text file with readable numbers in basic units 
          and additional header/footer information to be
          reloadable into UPL/UPD;
          can be read and changed by using any ASCII editor
          (e.g. NOTEPAD).
  EXPORT: text file with readable numbers in display units 
          without additional header/footer information 
          can be exported to many other programs (e.g. EXEL)
          without converting data or stripping additional
          information 
          Note: EXP files can not be reloaded to UPL/UPD.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.958
TITLE: Command: CL_EQ_FD

Volt Source sets the trace used to create the equalization
file.

Selection from:  TRACE A or TRACE B

Description:
    TRACE A:    Data is taken from @810[TRACE A].
    TRACE B:    Data is taken from @838[TRACE B].





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.959
TITLE: Command: CL_EQ_NF

Normfreq sets the reference frequency for the normalization
of the equalization file.

Selection from:  frequency value

Description:
    The bias is set to 1.0 at the given frequency.
    Only level ratios are stored in the file.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @80[Frequency units]


.960
TITLE: Command: CL_EQ_IV

Invert 1/n command defines whether the equalization
file is to be stored in normal or inverted form.

Selectable:  ON or OFF

Description:
    ON:     When an equalization file is created,
            the frequency response referred to
            @959[Standard frequency] is inverted.
    OFF:    Direct generation of the file
            (@959[Standard frequency] is referenced), ie
            only relative amplitudes are stored.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.961
TITLE: Command: MM_ST_NM

Filename sets the file, in which the list selected with
@956[Store] is stored.

Selection from:  @8[DOS]-filename

Description:
    default file extension: depends on the selected
    function.





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @9[filename]


.! @962 - @966 MM_ST_N0 - MM_ST_N4
.962
TITLE: About Print Comment

  @1017[Destin] = PRINTR/SPC
    (not PLOTTR/HPGL, FILE/PCX, FILE/HPGL, PRINTR/HPGL) 
    Selectable, whether an additional comment text
    is to be appended behind the hardcopy.
  @1017[Destin] = PRINTR/PS
           FILE/PS
           FILE/EPS
    Selectable, whether an additional text is to be printed
    - as title above or
    - as comment text behind 
    the hardcopy.

  This text may be created with the function "Edit Comment".
  A screen text editor is used, all standard control
  features (like cursor, @73[page up/down]) are implemented.
  The text editor is left with CTRL+ENTER (or ESC).

  A maximum of total 1500 characters and 256 characters in
  each line are allowed.

  The comment is not stored together with the @941[ACTUAL].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]  @14[H COPY]


.967
TITLE: FILE command MM_TI_UT

Headline: UTILS
.968
TITLE: Command: MM_DLT

Delete specifies the name of a file that should be erased.

Selectable:  @8[DOS] filename

Description:
    A window appears in which the file to be erased can be
    selected.

    Wild cards are not supported, only one file can be
    erased at one time.

    A read-only file cannot be erased with UPL software.
    To erase such a file the UPL must be exited with
    @19[SYSTEM] or Ctrl F9. Run the @8[DOS] program 'attrib'
    first.

Notes:
    Complete directories (including subdirectories) can be
    erased with the supplied program XDEL.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @9[Filename]


.! MM_DLT0 - MM_DLT4
.974
TITLE: Command: MM_CDR

Work Dir specifies the name of a @9[file] or of a directory
which should be used as the working directory.

Selectable:  @8[DOS]filename or directory.

Description:
  directory:
     For all operations where the @9[filenames]
     are specified without a directory, the directory
     given here will be used.

  Hint: It is useful to create a directory for each user.
     This will allow several users to work with the UPL
     in turn without affecting each other's results.

  Name of a @9[file] containing controls:
    The given file contains control statements, which
    allows the individual setting of the working directory
    for each file extension.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @9[File names]    @976[file syntax]


.! MM_CDR0 - MM_CDR4
.975
TITLE: Example for Work Dir Control

Example for @974[Work Dir] control file.

If a file name instead of a directory is given for
@974[Work Dir], individual working directories may
be defined for each file extension.

line:                       meaning:
 .SCO C:\EXAMPLE\SETUP      loading and storing of setups
 .SAC C:\EXAMPLE\SETUP      to/from \EXAMPLE\SETUP
 .TRC C:\EXAMPLE\TRACE      loading and storing of setups
 .PPC C:\UPL\USER           for protocol definitions
 .PAC C:\UPL\USER
 .PAU C:\UPL\USER
 .*   C:\UPL\USER           default path

Hint: More users can share the same path for setups, but
      can use different pathes for traces

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.976
TITLE: Work Dir Control Syntax

Syntax for controlling the @974[Work Dir] via a file:

If a file name instead of a directory is given for
@974[Work Dir], individual working directories may
be defined for each file extension.

Each line in the file contains the extension of a
file and the path associated with this extension.

The path associated with the extension ".*" set the
default working directory.

comment lines are allowed and start with #.

This file may be created with any editor which is
able to handle unformated ASCII.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @9[file name]  @975[example]


.980
TITLE: Command: MM_CY_SR

Copy sets the source file to be copied.

Selection from:  @8[DOS] filename

Description:
    The given file is copied to the file given in command
    @986[To].

    Wild cards (* and ?) are not supported.




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @9[filenames]


.! MM_CY_S0 - MM_CY_S4
.986
TITLE: Command: MM_CY_DS

To specifies the name of a file onto which a copy will
be made.

Selectable:  @8[DOS] filenames

Description:
    The file given by @980[Copy] is copied onto the
    file given here.

    Wild cards (* and ?) are not supported.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @9[Filenames]


.! MM_CY_D0 - MM_CY_D4
.992
TITLE: Command: XX_DS_SH

intern only!
exit to DOS-Shell

.993
TITLE: Command: FE_DUMMY

intern only!
dummy!

.994
TITLE: Command: OP_IN_SL

intern only!
dummy!

.995
TITLE: Options-Command: SY_CM_DV

Remote via sets the port for remote control.

Selectable:  IEC BUS, COM2:

Description:
  IEC BUS:   Remote control via IEEE bus
             (requires option UPL-B4)
  COM2:      Remote control via RS232, connected to
             COM 2.
             The parameter for the RS232 can be set
             with the following commands (requires 
             option UPL-B4).





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]



.996
TITLE: Command: SY_CM_AD

UPL IECadr sets the IEEE bus address the @1[UPL].

Selection from:  0 .. 31

Description:








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.997
TITLE: OPTIONS command MM_BS_FL

Call of BASIC macros.

Select from: @8[DOS] filename

Description:
  Available, if option UPL-B10 (Automatic Sequence
  Control) is installed.
  Inputs the name of a BASIC file that is to be executed
  as a macro under Automatic Sequence Control.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @96[OPTIONS panel]   @1199[Automatic Control (UPL-B10)]


.! MM_BS_F0 - MM_BS_F4
.1003
TITLE: Command: SY_BP_ST

Beeper sets the signal on wrong user inputs.

Selection from:  ON or OFF

Description:
    ON:  Wrong user input and errors are announced with
         a warning beep.

    OFF: no beeping!

Hint: Warning beep from @8[DOS] are not affected by this
      setting.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1004
TITLE: Command: OP_CF_TI

.1005
TITLE: Command: OP_CF_VL

DC Volt sets the (DC) output voltage on monitor output.

Selectable: -2V .. 2V   (-tdcl)
            -6V .. +6V  (-tdch)

Description:
    Attention:  THIS REQUIRES A MODIFIED HARDWARE!

    This command appears only if @1[UPL] is started
    with the command line option '-tdcl' or '-tdch'



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1006
TITLE: Command: OP_TI_TO

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1007
TITLE: Command: OP_TKOVR

The first 10 menu items of Param Link select a parameter
  preservation if the @1[UPL] enters a new function or
  instrument.
GEN -> ANL function tracking:
  Changing of the @262[generated waveform] forced the
  @93[analyzer] to select a suitable @528[measurement function].
  The selection must be confirmed.

parameter preservation of:
- configuration setting when changing between similar
  instruments; not between analogue and digital domain.
- waveform or measurement function, if the function is
  available in the new instrument.
- settings of single parameters (if possible).

  Example: Switching from

  RMS-@528[measurement]    to   DC-measurement
  +-----------+            +-----------+
  Ý @539[Meas time] +------+     Ý Meas Time +----+
  +-----------+      Ý     +-----------+    Ý
           ÝAUTO FASTÝ        +---> ÝFAST   Ý
           ÝAUTO     Ý        Ý +-> ÝVALUE: Ý
           ÝSUPERFASTÝ        Ý Ý   +-------+
           ÝFAST     Ý -------+ Ý FAST and VALUE:
           ÝSLOW     Ý          Ý may be preserved
           ÝVALUE:   Ý ---------+
           +---------+
- values, if the related unit is available in the new
  function or instrument.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1008
TITLE: OPTIONS Command B8_TITLE

@162[UPL16] only; title

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @102[GENERATOR type]   @425[ANALYZER type]   @157[DAI]

.1009
TITLE: OPTIONS Command B8_STAND

@162[UPL16] only; intern only

Select from: GSM, COMMON TEST

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @102[GENERATOR type]   @425[ANALYZER type]   @157[DAI]

.1010
TITLE: OPTIONS Command B8_INTRF

@162[UPL16] only; selects mode of DA interface.

Select from: DAI to MS, DAI to SS, AUX to SS

Description:
  DAI to MS: The UPL acts as a system simulator (SS) and
             can be connected to a mobile (MS).
             This operating mode, defined in GSM 11.10
             section 36.4, should always be used when
             connecting the UPL to a DAI-Mobile to
             perform the acoustic test cases.
             The UPL sends a reset pulse and then waits
             for the data clock to start data transmission.
  DAI to SS: UPL simulates a mobile (MS) and can be
             connected to a system simulator (SS).
             The direction of the signals on the DAI is
             inverted as against the DAI to MS status:
             the UPL waits for a reset pulse and then
             sends the data clock at the beginning of data
             transmission.
             In this mode a digital link can be set up to
             instruments the DAI of which is permanently
             configured as system simulator.
             This allows the UPL to be connected for
             instance to the digital interface of the
             speech coded of a system simulator.
             The test control lines are switched to high
             impedance.
  AUX to SS: The second (auxiliary) audio interface is used.
             It has the same function as the DAI to SS
             interface but another pin assignment.
             Only the pins designated "not used" in GSM
             11.10 are used for this additional interface.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @102[GENERATOR type]   @425[ANALYZER type]   @157[DAI]

.1011
TITLE: OPTIONS Command B8_MOBIL

@162[UPL16] only in DAI/AUX to SS mode;
Selects the behaviour of UPL as mobile on the DAI.

Select from: NORMAL, SPECIAL

Description:
  NORMAL:  The UPL acts as mobile as defined by GSM 11.10
           UPL waits for a reset pulse and then sends the
           data clock at the beginning of data transmission.
  SPECIAL: If the UPL is to be connected to a DAI which
           does not exactly corresponds to GSM 11.10
           specifications, the characteristics of the
           reset and clock signals can be changed here.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @102[GENERATOR type]   @425[ANALYZER type]   @157[DAI]

.1012
TITLE: OPTIONS Command B8_RESET

@162[UPL16] only; allows sending of (negative) reset pulse.
If @1011[Mobile] SPECIAL is selected direction of reset
line can be defined to be input or output.

Select from: START, INPUT

Description:
  START:  Reset line is defined to be output.
          UPL sends reset pulse upon confirmation of START.
  INPUT:  Reset line is defined to be input.
          UPL waits for reset pulse same as in NORMAL mode.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @102[GENERATOR type]   @425[ANALYZER type]   @157[DAI]

.1013
TITLE: OPTIONS Command B8_CLOCK

@162[UPL16] only; defines direction and polarity of clock line.

Select from: INPUT, INPUT INV, OUTPUT, OUTPUT INV

Description:
  INPUT     : UPL waits for the data clock.
  INPUT INV : UPL waits for the inverting data clock:
              data are taken over with the falling edge
              and change at the rising edge.
  OUTPUT    : UPL sends the data clock;
              same as in the NORMAL mode.
  OUTPUT INV: UPL sends the inverting data clock;
              see INPUT INV.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @102[GENERATOR type]   @425[ANALYZER type]   @157[DAI]

.1014
TITLE: OPTIONS Command B8_MODE

Available only with @162[UPL16] in "Interface DAI to MS" mode
or UPL-B29 (Digital Audio I/O 96 kHz).
@162[UPL16]:   Determines the @219[operating mode of the mobile].
UPL-B29: Determines the sampling range of both generator
         and analyzer.

  BASE RATE: Range of sampling frequency: 35 kHz ... 55 kHz.
             Best performance and no functional restriction
             Should always be choosen if
             - no digital instrument is selected or
             - neither generator nor analyzer is running
               at sample rates of more than 55 kHz.
  HIGH RATE: Range of sampling frequency: 35 kHz ... 106 kHz.
             Must be selected if generator or analyzer is
             running at sample rates of more than 55 kHz.
             Performance of 2-channel measurement is reduced.
             Restrictions in analyzer functionality:
             - no RUB&BUZZ measurement
             - 3rd OCTAVE measurement only in analog domain.
             - 3rd OCTAVE, WAVEFORM, PEAK and QPEAK
               measurement without filters.
             - digital phase measurement only with FFT, OFF
               or RMS measurement function
  Note: If the sample rate of DUT exceeds the upper limit
        of the sampling frequency range an overrun (ORUN)
        of DSP software may occure.
        If such a message appeares in the state field
        UPL has to be rebooted.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @102[GENERATOR type]   @425[ANALYZER type]

.1015
TITLE: OPTIONS Command B8_DAISR

@162[UPL16] in "Interface DAI to MS" mode only.
Selects the signal source of audio data from UPL to mobile.

Select from: AUDIO GEN, PCM Value 1

Description:
  AUDIO GEN:   If the digital generator is selected, the
               UPL sends the signal set in the generator
               panel. If the analog generator is selected
               the signal 0 is output.
  PCM Value 1: The signal is the PCM value 1 specified
               for certain test cases, irrespective of the
               generator setting. The LSB is set at each
               second data word, all other bits are 0.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @102[GENERATOR type]   @425[ANALYZER type]   @157[DAI]

.1016
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_TI_HC

Headline: SCREEN HARD COPY
.1017
TITLE: Command: DS_CP_MD

Destin determines where printout will take place and in
which format.
(printout is started with @14[H COPY] or Ctrl and F8)

Selectable: PRINTR/SPC,  PLOTTR/HPGL, FILE/PCX, FILE/HPGL,
            PRINTR/HPGL, PRINTR/PS,   FILE/PS,  FILE/EPS

Description:
    PRINTR/SPC:  Output takes place on the printer selected
                 in @1020[Printname]. The complete screen is
                 printed out. Printing takes place in the
                 background and can be made is faster if the
                 measurement is halted with the @17[STOP] key
                 (or Crtl F7).
             !-> Output port: LPT1: (PARALLEL PRINTER)
    PLOTTR/HPGL: The output will be in HPGL format on the
                 plotter at the interface @1031[Plot on]. With
                 @1019[Copy] the range to be plotted can be defined.
    FILE/PCX:    Output of a PCX pixel diagram to the file
                 given by @1034[Filename].
    FILE/HPGL:   Output of HPGL plot commands to the file
                 given by @1034[Filename].
                 With @1019[Copy] the range to be plotted can be
                 defined.
             !-> There are some (window based) programs which
                 cannot import HPGL error free.
                 (Please contact your salesman).
    PRINTR/HPGL: Printout is sent in HPGL format to printer
                 at the selected interface @1031[Plot on].
                 @1019[Copy] specifies the desired print area
                 Previous to the HPGL printout the contents
                 of prolog file C:\UPL\REF\GL_PRO.LOG is
                 sent to printer; after the printout the
                 contents of epilog file
                 C:\UPL\REF\GL_EPI.LOG is sent.
                 These Files may contain control sequences
                 for special printer activities.
                 Examples for laserjet3 printers are
                 HPLJ3_P.LOG and HPLJ3_E.LOG.
    PRINTR/PS:   Printout is sent in PostScript format to
                 (PostScript-capable) printer.
                 at the selected interface @1031[Plot on].
    FILE/PS:     Printout is written in PostScript format
                 to a file (*.PS).
    FILE/EPS:    Printout is written in encapsulated
                 PostScript format to a file (*.EPS).

    Settings of PostScript format:
    @1018[Color]       selects Color or B/W-Display,
    @1019[Copy]        selects the screen area to be printed
    @1022[Comment]     selects comment text,
    @1027[Paper Size]  selects paper format
    @1028[Orientation] selects paper orientation
    @1031[Plot on]     selects printer interface
    @1033[Plots/Page]  selects number of pictures per page

    The @86[PostScript configuration file] C:\UPL\REF\PS.CFG
    contains information about each curves and lines
    concerning color/gray level, line style and line width.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]  @1018[Color]   @1023[Left Margin]
@962[additional comment]



.1018
TITLE: Command: OP_PCXCO

Color selects the type of PCX file or plotter output.

Selection from:  ON or OFF

Description:
    ON:   Color printer mode:
          Destin FILE/PCX:  
           Palette information from file 
            C:\UPL\REF\PCX_CO.PLT used.
          Destin PLOTTR/HPGL:
          Destin PRINTR/HPGL:
          Destin FILE/HPGL:
            A change pen is included for every color.
          Destin PRINTR/PS:
          Destin FILE/PS:
          Destin FILE/EPS:
            For the printing of curves, limits and grids
            the color information in column 'Color' of 
            @86[PostScript configuration file] 
            C:\UPL\REF\PS.CFG is used

    OFF:  black/white printer mode
          Destin FILE/PCX:
            Palette information from file
            C:\UPL\REF\PCX_BW.PLT used.
          Destin PLOTTR/HPGL:
          Destin PRINTR/HPGL:
          Destin FILE/HPGL:
            A plot contain no change pens.
          Destin PRINTR/PS:
          Destin FILE/PS:
          Destin FILE/EPS:
            For the printing of curves, limits and grids
            the color information in column 'Gray' of
            @86[PostScript configuration file]
            C:\UPL\REF\PS.CFG is used

(Start of printing with @14[H COPY] or ctrl and F8)

get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1019
TITLE: Command: DS_CP_TY

Copy selects what to be printed.
(Start of printing with @14[H COPY] or ctrl and F8)

Selection from:  SCREEN, CURVE/GRID, CURVE

Description:
    SCREEN:     the whole screen is printed

    CURVE/GRID: only the measurement result curve and
                the grid is printed.

    CURVE:      only the measurement result curve is
                printed.

get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]   @962[additional comment]


.1020
TITLE: Command: DS_CP_PN

Printname selects the printer driver to be used.
(Start of printing with @14[H COPY] or Ctrl F8).

Selection from a list of printers

Description:
    The used printer can be selected directly.
    For color print out select printer type color
    not b/w.

Notes:
    The coloring scheme with color printers is defined
    in file PRN_CL.PLT. For b/w printers the dither cells
    are read from PRN_BW.PLT. Both files are located in
    directory \upl\ref and can be changed by user.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]  @9[filenames]   @1024[Resolution]


.1021
TITLE: Command: OP_FR_CO

Selects background color of @90[GRAPH Panel] and
@3[measurement display] frames for printing out the
display contents or copying them to a file.

Selection: WHITE, FILE DEF

Description:
    WHITE:    white background;
              should be used if a grey background is too
              dark for easy reading.
    FILE DEF: Destin = PRINTR/SPC, FILE/PCX:
                 the color no. 2 defined in
                 \upl\ref\prn_bw.plt (b/w printer) or
                 \upl\ref\prn_cl.plt (color printer) is
                 used.
              Destin = PRINTR/PS, FILE/PS, FILE/EPS:
                 The colour information for the frames of
                 the GRAPH panel is taken from the
                 PostScript configuration file
                 \upl\ref\PS.CFG, key word
                 "Background Frame Color".

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]  @1020[Printname]


.1022
TITLE: Command: OP_CMNT

Comment defines whether some text is printed with the
@14[hard copy] or not.

Selectable: ON | OFF

Description:
  ON:  After pressing @14[H COPY] (Ctrl F8) a menu box
       appears with the following options:
       - create a new @962[print comment]
       - edit comment
       - execute hard copy
  OFF: On a @14[H COPY] keystroke a hard copy without
       comment is initiated.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1023
TITLE: Command: OP_PRLMG

Left Marg sets the left border on printouts.

Selection from:  integer number

Description:
    The given number is the width of the left
    border in charakters (depending on printer).
    Attention: In some printers this feature is
    not implemented.


(Start of printing with @14[H COPY] or ctrl and F8)

get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]   @962[additional comment]


.1024
TITLE: Command: OP_PR_RE

Prn Resol sets the printing resolution.

Selectable: LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH

Description:
    LOW:    (e.g. 75dpi)
    MEDIUM: (e.g. 150dpi)
    HIGH:   (e.g. 300dpi)

The used resolution depends on the current printer.
If the desired resolution is not available, the
nearest available resolution is used.

get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]   @962[additional comment]


.1025
TITLE: Command: OP_CP_XS

X Scaling allows scaling of the x axis of the
@14[hard copy].

Selectable: Value from 0.1 ... 10

Description:
Each (pixel) printer has a given @1024[resolution] in x and y
direction which may produce in some cases distortion
of the hard copy.
To correct the x-y ratio, either x or @1026[y] may be
scaled.

Note:
If the given scaling is not a integer value, pixels
are suppressed or printed twice.

The resulting size is shown in the lines Prn Width
and Prn Height. For a correctly angled printing
a width/height ratio of 640/435  = 1.47 should be
used.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @1028[Orientation]


.1026
TITLE: Command: OP_CP_YS

Y Scaling allows scaling of the y axis of the
@14[hard copy].

Selectable: Value from 0.1 ... 10

Description:
Each (pixel) printer has a given @1024[resolution] in x and y
direction which may produce in some cases distortion
of the hard copy.
To correct the x-y ratio, either @1025[x] or y may be
scaled.

Note:
If the given scaling is not a integer value, pixels
are suppressed or printed twice.

The resulting size is shown in the lines Prn Width
and Prn Height. For a correctly angled printing
a width/height ratio of 640/435  = 1.47 should be
used.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @1028[Orientation]


.1027
TITLE: Command: OP_PSIZE

Selection from: A4, LETTER

Description:
  Hardcopy placement is optimized to the used paper format;
  only for @1017[Destin] PRINTR/PS, FILE/PS or FILE/EPS
  A4      (21 cm * 29,6 cm) corresponds to 600*845 points
          in PostScript Default system of co-ordinates.
          (1 point = 1/72 inch = 0,35 mm).
  LETTER  (8,5 inch * 11 inch = 21,6 cm * 27,9 cm) 
          corresponds to 617*797 points in PostScript 
          Default system of co-ordinates.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.1028
TITLE: Command: OP_CP_PO

Orientation of @14[hard copy].

Selectable: LANDSCAPE, PORTRAIT

Description:
LANDSCAPE                  PORTRAIT
+----------------+         +-------------+
Ý +---------+    Ý         Ý +---------+ Ý
Ý Ý HardcopyÝ    Ý         Ý Ý HardcopyÝ Ý
Ý Ý         Ý    Ý         Ý Ý         Ý Ý
Ý +---------+    Ý         Ý +---------+ Ý
+----------------+         Ý             Ý
                           Ý             Ý
                           +-------------+
Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @1025[XY-Scaling]


.1029
TITLE: Command: OP_PR_WI

.!Query only

.1030
TITLE: Command: OP_PR_HE

.!Query only

.1031
TITLE: Command: DS_CP_PL

Plot on sets the printer port.
(Start of printing with @14[H COPY] or Ctrl and F8)

Selection from:  IEC-BUS, COM2, LPT1

Description:
    IEC-BUS:    Print on IEC port,
                the address of the printer is given with
                @1032[IEC Adr]
    COM2:       serial port 2 (9 pol. DSUB), see also:
                @1044[baud rate], @1045[parity], @1047[stop bits], @1048[handshake]
    LPT1:       parallel printer port (25 pol. DSUB)




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1032
TITLE: Command: DS_CP_PA

IEC Adr sets the IEC address of the plotter.

Selection from:  0 .. 31

Description:
    The plotter is addressed via the IEEE bus under the
    given number as "listener".






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1033
TITLE: Command: OP_PPPAG

Selection from:  integer value: 1 .. 6

Description:
  Number of hardcopies placed on a PostScript page.

  If 2 or more hardcopies per page are selected, the HCOPY
  key opens a window that figures the printing sheet with
  the already placed hardcopies:

  solid area:   These pictures have already been placed
  hatched area: This picture is currently being printed
  clean area:   These pictures can still be placed

  FINISH aborts the current printout. The pictures already
  placed remain unaffected.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.1034
TITLE: Command: MM_SC_NM

Filename sets the destination file for printing.
(Start of printing with @14[H COPY] or Ctrl and F8)

Selection from:   @9[filename]

Description:
    predefined extension: *.PCX
    The output file may be postprocessed in @8[DOS]
    programs (eg DESIGNER).




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.! @1035 - @1039 MM_SC_N0 - MM_SC_N4
.1040
TITLE: Command: DS_CP_AB

Abort stops printing.

Selectable:  YES or NO

Description:
    YES:    stop printing
    NO:     continue printing






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @96[OPTIONS-Panel]


.1041
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_TI_PR

Headline: PRINT
.1042
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_PRINT

Type determines what is to be printed.

Selection from:  OFF, TRACE A, TRACE B, TRACE A+B,
                 X AXIS, Z AXIS, DWELL, EQUALIZATN,
                 LIM REPORT

Description:
    OFF:         no printing
    TRACE A:     print of data of @810[TRACE A]
    TRACE B:     print of data of @838[TRACE B]
    TRACE A+B:   print of data of @810[TRACE A] and @838[TRACE B]
    X AXIS:      points of @310[X-axis]
    Z AXIS:      points of @311[Z-axis]
    DWELL:       buffer of dwell times
    EQUALIZATN:  bias file (.VEQ); this file can be read
                 with 'Equalizer' in @286[generator] to 
                 bias the output or in @598[analyzer] to
                 modify the FFT spectrum.
    LIM REPORT:  list of limit exceeds


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1043
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_CO_TI

z.Z. nicht freigeschaltet.

Selection from:  

Description:


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1044
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_CO_BD

Baud Rate sets the speed of serial port COM2:

Selection from:  
        2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600 Baud
        19200, 38400, 56000, 115000 Baud

Description:
        If the communication fails, reducing the
        the speed may help; longer cables and/or
        modems requires lower baudrates.

The settings of COM2: should be equal on both
devices.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1045
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_CO_PA

Parity selects the optional parity-bit in the
serial transmition.

Selection from:   NONE, EVEN, ODD

Description:
    NONE: no parity bit is added.
    EVEN: a parity bit is added; the sum of all
          bits is even. (default)
    ODD:  a parity bit is added; the sum of all
          bits is odd.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1046
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_CO_DB

Data Bits sets the number of transmitted bits.

Selection from:   7 or 8

Description:
    7:      7 data bits are transmitted.
    8:      8 data bits are transmitted. (default)

Note: 8 data bits are necessary to transmit full
    character set and binary numbers. Thus it is
    highly recommended to use 8 data bits.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1047
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_CO_SB

Stop Bits selects the number of bits following the
data bits.

Selection from:  1 or 2

Description:
    2 if the default setting.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1048
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_CO_HS

Handshake selects the type of syncronisation.

Selection from:   RTS/CTS or XON/XOFF

Description:
    RTS/CTS: Hardware handshake via RTS and CTS lines.
             (default)
    XON/XOFF: Software handshake via reserved charakters
             ^S and ^Q (XOFF and XON).




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1049
TITLE: Command: SY_TI_PK

Headline: Panel Keys
.1050
TITLE: Command: SY_KY_RR

Reptn Rate sets the repetition rate of the keyboard.

Selection from:  frequency value: 0 .. 20 Hz

Description:
    After expire of @1051[Rep Delay] the pressed key
    is repeated with the given frequency.






Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1051
TITLE: Command: SY_KY_RD

Rep Delay: Delay time from key press to the start of
           auto repeat.

Selection from:  time value: 0 .. 1s

Description:
    On key press the key function is executed once. After
    the delay the key execution is repeated with the
    frequency given in @1050[Reptn Rate].




Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1052
TITLE: Command: SY_TI_CC

Headline: Display
.1053
TITLE: OPTIONS Command: DS_EX_ST

Extrn Disp sets the mode of the built-in graphic-card.
           (VGA adapter on @8[DOS] PC).

Selection from: INTERN ONLY, BOTH COLOR, BOTH AUTO, BOTH B/W

Description:
    INTERN ONLY:  UPL uses the internal LCD screen only.
                  The use of color depends on the type of
                  LCD built in.
                  With model UPL-66 this menu item is
                  ignored and BOTH COLOR set instead.
    BOTH COLOR:   Simultaneous display of internal LCD
                  and on external CRT in color.
    BOTH AUTO:    Simultaneous display of internal LCD
                  and on external CRT. The use of color
                  depends on the type of LCD built in.
    BOTH B/W:     Simultaneous display of internal LCD
                  and on external CRT in black/white.

Notes:  Key @12[CONTRAST] or ctrl F10 turns on a menu for the
        contrast setting.
        Monochrom monitors force the VGA card to use the
        memory B0000-B8000; in this case the include in the
        config.sys must be removed.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @3[Screen usage]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1054
TITLE: Command: SY_RM_DS

Meas Disp enables the actualizing of the measurement and
          status display.

Selectable:  ON or OFF

Description:
    ON:  Measurement values and @7[status information] are
         displayed actually.
    OFF: update of measurements values and status infor-
         mation is suppressed. This speeds up measurements
         (i.e. SWEEP or @30[FFT]).

Note: Ctrl + D toggles this setting.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @3[Screen usage]  @4[keys]  @96[OPTIONS panel]  @1055[Read. Rate]


.1055
TITLE: Command: OP_READR

Read. Rate sets the display update rate.

Selectable: MAX SPEED, 6/s, 3/s, 1/s

Description:
    MAX SPEED:     every measurement result is displayed.
    6/s, 3/s, 1/s: display updates correspondingly slower.

    A measurement result is not displayed, if there is
    not enough delay since the last output.
    This setting influences only continous measurements;
    all other modes (e.g. SWEEP) are not affected.

    The measurement display may be turned off with the
    key @1054[Strg D].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @3[Screen usage]  @4[keys]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1056
TITLE: Command: OP_RESOL

Read Resol sets the decimal places of the measurement
display windows.

Selectable:  see menu

Description:
    If this menu item is selected, a popup menu appears;
    This menu allows the individual setting of the
    decimal places for each measurement window.



Get more help about:
@1055[Reading Rate]
@1[UPL]  @3[Screen usage]  @4[keys]  @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1057
TITLE: Command: OP_TX_TI

Help for this command is not yet available.

Selection from:

Description:

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]   @88[Inputs]


.1058
TITLE: Command: OP_TRACC

Selection from: MANUAL, DEFAULT, AUTO COLOR, AUTO LINE

Description:
 MANUAL:
   The color/gray level and line style of each scan number
   entered in the following menu lines @1059[Scannr.(A)] and
   @1062[Scannr.(B)] can be individually selected
 DEFAULT:
   automatic color and line style setting for all 17 scans
   of Trace A and Trace B. All scans of trace A will be
   painted green, all scans of trace B will be painted
   yellow; all scans of both traces will be painted
   with solid thin lines.
 AUTO COLOR:
   Automatic color setting for all 17 scans of Trace A and
   Trace B. In color mode there are 6 colors that are
   related to scan number 1 .. 6: GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE,
   CYAN, MAGENTA, WHITE; scan 7 wraps around to GREEN.
   In B/W mode there are 3 gray levels that are related to
   scan number 1 .. 3: BLACK, DARK GRAY, LIGHT GRAY;
   scan 4 wraps around to BLACK.
   Different line style are used for trace A and B.
 AUTO LINE:
   Automatic line style setting for all 17 scans of Trace A
   and Trace B. There are 4 thin line styles that are
   related to scan number 1 .. 4:
   ______, ------, ......, .-.-.-; scan 5 wraps around
   to ______.
   Different line colors (green, yellow) are used for
   trace A and B.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.1059
TITLE: Command: OP_TA_NR

Selection from:  integer value: 0 .. 17

Description:
  Specifies the Scan number (1 ... 17) that the following
  @1060[Color(A)]/gray level or @1061[Line(A)] is to be related to.

  If Scan number 0 is selected, all 17 scans are related to
  the same color/gray level or line style that subsequently
  is selected.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.1060
TITLE: Command: OP_TA_CO

Selection from: GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE, CYAN, MAGENTA, WHITE
                BLACK, DARK GRAY, LIGHT GRAY

Description:
  Defines the color/gray level of the @1059[Scannr.(A)].
  Colors can be defined, if @1053[Extern Display] is set
  to 'BOTH COLOR' or set to 'BOTH AUTO' and color TFT is
  installed; otherwise gray levels can be defined.
  to 'BOTH COLOR'; otherwise gray levels can be defined.

  If a color/gray level is selected while @1059[Scannr.(A)] = 0,
  all 17 scans are related to this color/gray level.
  To avoid this function being called by mistake, the
  user is prompted to confirm this selection.

  If @808[Scan Count] is set to 1 and the color of Scan #1
  is selected, measured values, bargraphs and
  @801[protocol analysis] are displayed in this color too.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.1061
TITLE: Command: OP_TA_LI

Selection from: ------, ------, ......, .-.-.- 
                ------, ======, ::::::, :=:=:=

Description:
  Defines the line style of the @1059[Scannr.(A)].

  If a line style is selected while @1059[Scannr.(A)] = 0,
  all 17 scans are related to this line style.
  To avoid this function being called by mistake, the
  user is prompted to confirm this selection.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.1062
TITLE: Command: OP_TB_NR

Selection from:  integer value: 0 .. 17

Description:
  Specifies the Scan number (1 ... 17) that the following
  @1063[Color(B)]/gray level or @1064[Line(B)] is to be related to.

  If Scan number 0 is selected, all 17 scans are related
  to the same color/gray level or line style that
  subsequently is selected.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.1063
TITLE: Command: OP_TB_CO

Selection from: GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE, CYAN, MAGENTA, WHITE
                BLACK, DARK GRAY, LIGHT GRAY

Description:
  Defines the color/gray level of the @1062[Scannr.(B)].
  Colors can be defined, if @1053[Extern Display] is set to
  'BOTH COLOR'; Otherwise gray levels can be defined.

  If a color/gray level is selected while @1062[Scannr.(B)] = 0,
  all 17 scans are related to this color/gray level.
  To avoid this function being called by mistake, the
  user is prompted to confirm this selection.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.1064
TITLE: Command: OP_TB_LI

Selection from: ------, ------, ......, .-.-.- 
                ------, ======, ::::::, :=:=:=

Description:
  Defines the line style of the @1062[Scannr.(B)].

  If a line style is selected while @1062[Scannr.(B)] = 0,
  all 17 scans are related to this line style.
  To avoid this function being called by mistake, the
  user is prompted to confirm this selection.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @93[ANALYZER]


.1065
TITLE: Command: DS_ENABL

Intern Only
Display On/Off, nur per IEC und Hardkey

.1066
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_TI_VS

Headline: Versions
.1067
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_TI_SW

Headline: Software
.1068
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_SV_UI

Version of: Software UI
.1069
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_SV_HW

Version of: Software HW
.1070
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_SV_IE

Version of: Software IEC
.1071
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_TI_HA

Headline: Hardware Analog
.1072
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_WV_A1

Version of: Analog Ch1
.1073
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_WV_A2

Version of: Analog Ch2
.1074
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_WV_MB

Version of: Motherboard
.1075
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_WV_GN

Version of: Analog Generator
.1076
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_WV_DA

Version of: DAC
.1077
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_TI_HD

Headline: Hardware Digital
.1078
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_DV_AN

Version of: Digital Analyzer
.1079
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_DV_GN

Version of: Digital Generator
.1080
TITLE: OPTIONS command LANGU_TI

Headline: Language
.1081
TITLE: OPTIONS Command: LANGUAGE

Language sets the used language for help.

Selection from:   ENGLISH, GERMAN

Description:
    ENGLISH:    Help messages appear in English (UK).
    GERMAN:     Help messages appear in German (GR).

Notes:  @4[keyboard] setting is done through different
    files autoexec.bat.
    BOOTSET is the batch file which performs the setting.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @3[Screen usage]  @96[OPTIONS panel]  @8[DOS]


.1082
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_TI_OP

Headline: Options
.1083
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_OP_LG

Version of: Low Distortion Gen
.1084
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_OP_IE

Version of: IEC-Board
.1085
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_OP_AE

Version of: AES/EBU
.1086
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_OP_SW

Version of: UPD-B5
.1087
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_OP_HA

Version of: Highspeed Option Analog
.1088
TITLE: OPTION command SY_OP_HD

Version of: Highspeed Option Digital
.1090
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_OP_81

Version of: Not Named UPL SW option
.1092
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_OP_NG

Version of: Not Named Generator
.1093
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_OP_NA

Version of: Not Named Analysator
.1094
TITLE: OPTIONS command SY_OP_33

Version of: ITU-T O33 (UPL-B33)
.1095
.!TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_SW_TI
.!Header Switcher
TITLE: about Switcher

The Switcher UPZ from R&S allows the extension of input
and output channels of @1[UPL]. The switcher contains relais
allowing the connection of two rails (A and B) with
8 channels.

The Switcher UPZ must be connected via a RS232 extension 
cable (9 pin, plug/socket, pins connected one by one) at 
the COM1 port at the rear of the UPL. 
In case of switcher controlling, the RS232 parameters are 
set fix to 9600 Baud, No Parity, 8 Bit and 1 Stop Bit.

With the same cables it is possible to cascade maximum
32 switcher. So it's possible to control up to 
16 input switcher (128 input channels) and up to 
16 output switcher (128 output channels).

After a switch and a delay of 5 ms for the settling of
the contacts the measurement is restarted. Additional
delays may be set with @478[Start Cond].

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]  @1096[Switcher]   @1097[Tracking]


.1096
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_SWIT

The menu element Switcher enables the control of external
switching boxes UPZ from R&S.

Selectable:   OFF or ON

Description:
    OFF: switcher control panel off
    ON:                         on

The @1[UPL] checks the addresses of the connected switchers.
The detected switcher configuration can be checked by 
typing the command TYPE UPZCONF.TXT <CR> under @8[DOS].
If a channel command (see @1100[Input A], @1101[Input B],
@1102[Output A] or @1103[Output B]) is issued and if there
is no switcher connected at this destination, a warning is
shown. 

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]  @1095[Switcher]   @1097[Tracking]


.1097
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_SWTRK

Tracking selects whether the channel numbers are set
individually or together (with a selectable offset)

Selectable: ON or OFF

Description:
   OFF:    The channels
           @1100[Input A],  @1101[Input B],
           @1102[Output A], @1103[Output B]
           are set individually.
   B vs A: The channels A and B are set together.
           An @1098[Offset between channel B and A] may be
           selected. If a channel number is modified, the 
           other channels are modified correspondingly.
   Out vs Inp: The channels A and B are set together.
           An @1099[Offset between output and input] may be
           selected. If a channel number is modified, the 
           other channels are modified correspondingly.
   ALL:    The channels A and B are set together; An
           @1098[Offset between channel B and A] and an
           @1099[Offset between output and input] may be
           selected.
           If a channel number is modified, the other
           channels are modified correspondingly.
    

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]  @96[OPTIONS panel]  @1095[Switcher]   @1096[Switching On]


.1098
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_SWCHO

B vs A sets the offset between the channels of rail B and
the channels of rail A.

Selectable:   -128 .. 128

Description:
  -128 .. -1: channel number B is smaller than channel
              number A.
           0: is not available and will be corrected to
              1 or -1 to avoid that the relais of same 
              channel on rail A and rail B will be switched
              on simultaneously. 
              So a conflict by short-circuit will be
              avoided. 
    1 .. 128: channel number B is higher than channel
              number A.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @1095[Switcher]   @1097[Tracking]   @1099[Offset Out vs Inp]


.1099
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_SWOIO

Out vs Inp sets the offset between output and input
channels.

Selectable:   -128 .. 128

Description:
  -128 .. -1: channel number of output switcher is smaller
              than channel number of input switcher.
           0: both channels (input and output) are equal.
    1 .. 128: channel number of output switcher is higher
              than channel number of input switcher.



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @1095[Switcher]   @1097[Tracking]   @1098[Offset Ch1-Ch2]


.1100
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_SWIC1

Input A selects the channel connected to rail A
of the input switcher.

Selectable:    integer 0 .. 128

Description:
   0:      The input A is not connected.
   1..128: The input A is connected to the given
           channel.

It is not possible to set an identical channel 
number on rail A and B because of the switcher 
hardware to avoid conflicts by short-circuit. 
To get the same status on UPL display and activated
channel the input will be corrected automatically.

Note: If @1097[tracking] is set, the resulting value of 
      @1101[Input B], @1102[Output A] and @1103[Output B]
      will be changed if necessary.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @1095[Switcher]   @1097[Tracking]


.1101
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_SWIC2

Input B selects the channel connected to rail B
of the input switcher.

Selectable:    integer 0 .. 128

Description:
   0:      The input B is not connected.
   1..128: The input B is connected to the given
           channel.

It is not possible to set an identical channel 
number on rail A and B because of the switcher
hardware to avoid conflicts by short-circuit. 
To get the same status on UPL display and activated
channel the input will be corrected automatically.

Note: If @1097[tracking] is set, the resulting value of 
      @1101[Input B], @1102[Output A] and @1103[Output B]
      will be changed if necessary.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @1095[Switcher]   @1097[Tracking]


.1102
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_SWOC1

Output A selects the channel connected to rail A
of the output switcher.

Selectable:    integer 0 .. 128

Description:
   0:      The output A is not connected.
   1..128: The output A is connected to the given
           channel.

It is not possible to set an identical channel 
number on rail A and B because of the switcher 
hardware to avoid conflicts by short-circuit. 
To get the same status on UPL display and activated 
channel the input will be corrected automatically.

Note: If all output channels are to be switched
      in parallel, see the setting -1 on @1103[Output B].

Note: If @1097[tracking] is set, the resulting value of 
      @1100[Input A], @1101[Input B] and @1103[Output B]
      will be changed if necessary.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @1095[Switcher]   @1097[Tracking]


.1103
TITLE: OPTIONS command OP_SWOC2

Output B selects the channel connected to rail B 
of the output switcher.

Selectable:    integer -1 .. 128

Description:
   -1:     All channels of rail B of the Output 
           switcher are connected.
           The setting of -1 is excluded with @1097[Tracking]
           avoiding the accidental switching on of all 
           channels.
           If @1102[Output A] is 0, all channels of 
           rail B are connected.
           if @1102[Output A] is not set to 0, all
           channels except the one set with Output A are
           connected.
   0:      The output B is not connected.
   1..128: The output B is connected to the given
           channel.

It is not possible to set an identical channel 
number on rail A and B because of the switcher 
hardware to avoid conflicts by short-circuit. 
To get the same status on UPL display and activated
channel the input will be corrected automatically.

Note: If @1097[tracking] is set, the resulting value of 
      @1100[Input A], @1101[Input B] and @1102[Output A]
      will be changed if necessary.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @1095[Switcher]   @1097[Tracking]


.1104
TITLE: OPTIONS command CAL_A_TI

Header Calibrat Analyzer
.1105
TITLE: OPTIONS command: CALIBRAT

ZERO AUTO defines when the internal DC offset of the
analog analyzer is to be calibrated.

Selectable: OFF, ON, ONCE

Description:
    OFF:        No calibration between measurements.
                A (small) DC offset will be present
                during the AC-measurements.
    ON:         Automatic calibration of DC offset at time
                intervals specified by the UPL and at
                analyzer instrument changes.
    ONCE:       An immediate single calibration,
                then as ON.

Notes: CAL appears in the @7[Status display] during
    calibration;
    The message WAIT FOR CAL shows that an internal
    calibration should be done, measurement may be
    continued anyhow.
    No calibration is performed while a @535[non-precision]
    sweep is running

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1106
TITLE: OPTIONS command: CAL_ANL

CH2 AUTO calibrates channel 2.

Selectable: OFF, ONCE

Description:
    OFF:        No calibration between measurements.
    ONCE:       An immediate single calibration of
                analyzer channel 2 against channel 1.

Notes:
    This calibration is only necessary if the option
    UPL-B3 is installed or removed.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1107
TITLE: OPTIONS command CAL_G_TI

Header Calibrat Generator
.1108
TITLE: OPTIONS command: CAL_GEN

LDG AUTO calibrates the Low Distortion Generator.

Selectable: OFF, ONCE

Description:
    OFF:        No calibration.
    ONCE:       Calibrates the Low Distortion Generator
                of the @1[UPL]. This command should only
                be executed after a warmup of at least 2h.

Note: item appears only if LDG is installed.


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @96[OPTIONS panel]



.1109
TITLE: OPTIONS-Command: CAL_D_TI

head line, free




.1110
TITLE: OPTIONS command: CAL_DIG

PhaseToRef calibrates the PLL of UPL-B2 or UPL-B29.

Selectable: OFF, ONCE

Description:
    OFF:        No calibration.
    ONCE:       An immediate single calibration of
                UPL-B2 / UPL-B29.

Notes:
    This calibration is only necessary if the option
    UPL-B2 / UPL-B29 is installed or removed.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @96[OPTIONS panel]


.1111
TITLE: OPTIONS-Command: DG_PSWRD

Enter a password to get access to diagnostic functions.
(reserved for R&S service).











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]    @96[OPTIONS-Panel]


.! @1112 bis @1116 DG_PSWR0 - DG_PSWW4
.1117
TITLE: Command: DS_CONF

IEEE bus only!
setup display configuration

.1118
TITLE: Command: DG_ST

Diagnostic state:
(reserved for R&S service)

Selectable: ON or OFF

Description:
            ON:  switches to service MODE
            OFF: restores UPL





Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1119
TITLE: Command: DG_AGD_A

Calibration value: DAC board AC
(reserved for R&S service)











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1120
TITLE: Command: DG_AGD_D

Calibration value: DAC board offset
(reserved for R&S service)











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1121
TITLE: Command: DG_AG_EN

Enable bit (On or OFF)
(reserved for R&S service)











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1122
TITLE: Command: DG_AG_BD

Selected board analog generator
(reserved for R&S service)











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1123
TITLE: Command: DG_AG_NU

Bit position of bit to be changed
(reserved for R&S service)










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1124
TITLE: Command: DG_AG_CN

Bit count to be changed
(reserved for R&S service)











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1125
TITLE: Command: DG_AG_VL

Value of bits to be modified (entered in radix decimal!)
Value must fit in place reserved with @1123[count].
(reserved for R&S service)










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1126
TITLE: Command: DG_AG_EX

Moves the bit stream to ANALOG generator
(reserved for R&S service)











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1127
TITLE: Command: DG_AA_BD

INSTALL KEY indicates that the identification numbers
of the software options are entered in the following
fields @1128[Address] and @1130[Value].










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]

The following information is intended for R&S service
personnel only and only appears if Service Mode is
enabled.

Selected board
with AES/EBU:
    DSP A: preprocessor
    DSP B: measurement processor
    RX1:   AES/EBU main receiver
    RX2:   AES/EBU aux receiver
    TX1:   AES/EBU main transmitter
    TX2:   AES/EBU aux transmitter

with EEPROM:
  SER.NUMBER:     Serial number of UPL
  INSTALL KEY:    Enable/Disable Software Options
  CAL LDG:        Calibration data low distortion
  CAL AGEN:       Calibration data generator
  CAL ANLR0:      Calibration data analyzer

with TEMPERATURE:
  READ TEMP:      performs a readout of temp sensors
  
Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1128
TITLE: Command: DG_AA_NU

Address is used to enter the number of the software option
to be enabled. This number is to be found on the label
or in the installation instructions.

The following is the valid assignment:
    0:  UPL-B4      Remote Control (IEEE bus and RS232)
    1:  UPL-B21     Digital Audio Protocol
    2:  UPL-B22     Jitter and Interface Test
    3:  UPL-B10     Universal Sequence Controller
    4:  UPL-B6      Extended Analysis
    5:  UPL-B33     ITU-T33
    6:  UPL-B8      GSM Phone Tests
    7:  UPL-B23     Coded Audio Signal Generation
    8:  UPL-B9      3G Phone Tests 

In the field @1130[Value] the Installation Key is to be entered.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]
If Service Mode is enabled

local address of selected unit.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1129
TITLE: Command: DG_AA_CN


Bit count to be changed
(reserved for R&S service)










Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1130
TITLE: Command: DG_AA_VL

The Installation Key of the selected software option is
entered with Value.

At first the number of the software option to be enabled
must be entered with @1128[Address],
then the so-called Installation Key is entered here.
After successful installation, the @1[UPL] is to be
restarted in order for enabling of the software option
to take effect.

An Installation Key is only valid for the instrument with
the serial number indicated and cannot be used on any
other instrument.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]

If Service Mode is enabled:

Value of bits to be modified (entered in radix decimal!)
Value must fit in place reserved with @1129[count].
(reserved for R&S service)








Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1131
TITLE: Command: DG_AA_FL

EEPROM


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1132
TITLE: Command: DG_AA_ST

EEPROM


Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.! @1133-@1137 DG_AA_S0-DG_AA_S4
.1138
TITLE: Command: DG_AA_EX

Moves the bit stream to ANALOG analyzer
(reserved for R&S service)











Get more help about:
@1[UPL]


.1139
TITLE: Command: SY_VRSN

IEEE bus only!

.1140
TITLE: Command: SY_ERR

IEEE bus only!

.1141
TITLE: Command: SY_GTL

IEEE bus only!

Goto LOCAL (execute)
.1142
TITLE: Command: ST_RST

IEEE bus only!

.1143
TITLE: Command: ST_TST

IEEE bus only!

.1144
TITLE: Command: FO_DATA

IEEE bus only!


.1145
TITLE: Command: CL_LM_FL

IEEE bus only!

.1146
TITLE: Command: BLK_NAME

IEEE bus only!

.1147
TITLE: Command: BLK_DATA

IEEE bus only!

.1148
TITLE: Command: BLK_CNT

IEEE bus only!

.1149
TITLE: Command: DS_CRDT1

IEEE bus only!

.1150
TITLE: Command: DS_CRDT2

IEEE bus only!

.1151
TITLE: Command: DS_CRDT3

IEEE bus only!

.1152
TITLE: Command: O33_IN

IEEE bus only!

.! @1153-@1157 O33 input string
.1158
TITLE: Command: O33_OUT

IEEE bus only!

.! @1159-@1165 O33 output string
.1166
TITLE: Command: OP_UIINF

IEEE bus only!

.1198
TITLE: Command: OP_DUMMY

IEEE bus only!

.1199
TITLE: About Automatic Control (UPL-B10, BASIC)

Executing frequent test sequences in a fast and repeatable
way, summing up the results and creating a valuable
documentation, these are the applications of the automatic
UPL control with R&S Basic.

Get more information on BASIC:
    @1201[Activate]
    @1200[Logging, save commands]
    @1202[Installation]
    @1203[Calling parameters]



Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[Keys]


.1200
TITLE: About logging

The function key F2 switches the "logging mode" on and off.
The respective mode is indicated in the bottom right corner
above the softkeys. In the case of "on", all entries used
for setting the UPL are appended to the Basic program as
command line. After @1201[switching to the Basic mode], these new
lines are displayed automatically and can be modified, if
necessary.

The Basic commands for automatic control of the UPL differ
only slightly from the commands for remote control via the
IEEE bus. The program can easily be converted into the other
commands using the Basic command REPLACE (e.g. for
controlling the UPL using an external controller). See also
UPL-specific modifications of the Basic manual, paragraph
REPLACE.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[Keys]   @1199[BASIC]


.1201
TITLE: About switching to BASIC

The function key F3 switches between the UPL and the @1199[Basic]
input mode.

If Basic is in the input mode, the fields for output of
measured values appear at the upper edge, irrespective of
whether picture graphics is selected in the UPL or not. The
field below down to the softkeys is available to Basic.
When returning to UPL operation, the panels are first
completely built up again in order to exactly indicate the
instantaneous settings, since they may have been changed
from Basic. Basic becomes inactive, but its last status
is maintained.

While Basic is waiting for a line entry (as after pressing
of <cr>, the @1[UPL] program continuous to run in the back-
ground, and the measurement results are indicated. The
effects produced by the settings made by Basic can thus be
observed immediately.

Possible error messages after pressing of the F3 key:
  - "stringx.sys device driver not loaded",
          Basic has not been @1202[installed] correctly
  - "memory not available"
          a memory size has been selected with UPLSET
          for which the available space is not sufficient.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[Keys]   @1199[BASIC]   @1203[calling parameters]


.1202
TITLE: About Installation of UPL-B10, BASIC

UPL-B10 is installed by typing acinst at the prompt A:>.

Subsequently, a memory model for Basic can be selected by
calling UPLSET. The user indicates how much memory he wants
to reserve for the Basic program and Basic data (variables).

To estimate the required memory, the following rough values
are given: A typical Basic line requires about 25 bytes.
13k program memory is thus sufficient for about 500 lines
or 10 pages of program. The remaining empty memory can be
polled in Basic with FREE(1). A variable in Basic requires
about 15 bytes (depending on the length of the name), and a
field with floating-point numbers requires 8 bytes for each
index. FREE(0) indicates the remaining storage area.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[Keys]   @1199[BASIC]   1005[calling parameters]


.1203
TITLE: Command line parameters for BASIC

Since the memory available to MS-DOS programs is limited,
the overlay technique is used in the UPL program. Further-
more, Basic requires memory for the user program and its
data (variables). These memoryareas are assigned the
parameters

    -bp<n> for the program memory and
    -bd<n> for the data memory.

Example:
upl -bp16 -bd8

reserves 16k main memory for the program and 8k for the
data, Basic itself needing about 3k for its own management.

The minimum values are about 8k program and 4k data. Basic
can manage a maximum of 64k. However, with a size of
about 2 times 32 k, the overlay memory for the UPL program
is decreased, reducing the program speed. More detailed
specifications are not possible, since the available total
memory, which may be occupied by resident programs and
device drivers, may vary to a great extent.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[Keys]   @1199[BASIC]   1006[Memory]


.1204
TITLE: Memory Usage on UPL

The memory management of the @1[UPL] program is to be briefly
explained in the following so that an expertized user can
optimize his own configuration. The program and data memory
used for Basic is first reserved in the UMB area. If this
is not possible (because the line DOS=HIGH,UMB is missing
in the CONFIG.SYS, or too may other programs have been 
loaded into this area by LOADHIGH or DEVICEHIGH), the space
in the conventional memory (below 640k) is used. If the 
remaining memory for the UPL program becomes too small then,
no memory is reserved for Basic at all. The attempt to 
switch to @1199[Basic] then produces the error message "not
enough memory for BASIC". If space in the conventional
memory is to be used, the overlay memory is decreased.
The UPL program may be restricted in its speed from a
certain size onwards, which also depends on the memory
required by other resident programs.

Get more help about:
@1[UPL]   @4[Keys]   @1199[BASIC]


.End
 
 
 
ÿ